Sales /visma-net-erp/help/sales section In the sales process, you can manage customers, sales prices, non-stock items and discounts. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales In the sales process, you can manage customers, sales prices, non-stock items and discounts. You can also generate recurring transactions. Click the links below to learn more about a topic you are interested in. Use the breadcrumb links in the upper left corner to see your location, navigate backwards or go to the starting point. Sales - overview /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-overview page By using the Inventory workspace, your company can easily configure and adjust sales order processing to fit your sales workflows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales - overview By using the Inventory workspace, your company can easily configure and adjust sales order processing to fit your sales workflows. By using the Inventory workspace, your company can easily configure and adjust sales order processing to fit your sales workflows. Visma Net provides typical predefined order types, and you can additionally create custom types of orders with specific processing. The Inventory workspace provides instant access to accurate inventory allocation information, as well as flexible pricing and discounting policies. With Visma Net, your company can fulfill orders accurately, consistently, and efficiently. The primary functionalities of the Inventory workspace are described briefly below and extensively in other topics in this section. ## Configurable order types Visma Net includes a set of predefined order types for common distribution operations; you can also define custom order types to meet specific order processing requirements. For each order type, you can specify inventory allocation rules, workflow scenario, and the type of document to be generated in the Customer ledger and Inventory workspaces. For more information, see the following topics: + [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/) + [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/) + [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/) + [About invoices in the sales workspace](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-invoices-in-the-sales-workspace/) ## Credit limit verification Before releasing a sales order, the system performs a credit check for the customer. Orders placed on credit hold can be released from credit hold if customer payments were entered or order amounts were appropriately decreased. Authorised users can override the credit hold status and force order fulfillment. ## Approval of sales orders You can set up parallel or multi stage approval of sales orders of the **SO** and **IN** types. ## Consolidated and partial shipments You can specify a different delivery date for each line item on a sales order. By using the warehouse availability information and cost data, the system can split a sales order into multiple shipments from different warehouses. Also, the system tracks the remaining balances of orders and manages back orders. For more details, see: [About shipment processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/about-shipment-processing-options/). ## Automatic packaging and freight calculation With Visma Net you can make processing of shipments more effective by configuring automatic packaging suggestions. With the **Automatic packaging** functionality configured, the system automatically selects the minimal set of packaging boxes for each sales order. Also, you can configure freight calculation. For details, see the following topics: + [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/) + [About freight calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation/) ## Integrated workflow Visma Net provides an integrated workflow so you can automate order processing and eliminate unnecessary steps. You can add tasks and activities for employees handling the orders, and set up notifications to be automatically triggered during order processing. ## Integration with the Inventory workspace Due to seamless integration with the Inventory workspace, the Inventory workspace provides real-time data about inventory levels of items on the sales order, including information about how each item is allocated. During the entry of a sales order, the system will notify the user if the quantity is not available or allocated through multiple warehouse locations or warehouses. You can configure the inventory allocation rules for each step of the sales process for custom order types. ## Stock reservation Visma Net allows you to perform stock reservations when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer cannot be shipped to another customer. In case when items are stocked at multiple warehouses, this helps avoid overstocks and stock outs because the system gives you the ability to reserve items at any warehouse and automates transfers. For more information, see: [Sales orders with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations/). ## Integration with the Purchases workspace The Inventory and Purchases workspaces are tightly integrated. With Visma Net, you can link sales orders with purchase orders, so that goods received from suppliers will be used for specific sales orders. The Inventory workspace supports **Back order** and **Drop shipment** functionalities. For more information, see: [About links between sales orders and purchase orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-links-between-sales-orders-and-purchase-orders/). ## Customer return support Visma Net provides the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns and ensure complete traceability of these operations. Your company can set up its own return policies by using specific predefined order types and by creating custom order types for authorised and unauthorised returns. For more information, see: [Process returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/). ## Other functionalities and options The Inventory workspace lets you do the following: + On order and invoice documents, view the total weight, volume, and units + Easily attach scanned images or electronic versions of sales orders to facilitate tracking and processing of the orders + Add notes with shipping and handling instructions to sales orders or specific lines of sales orders + Combine multiple orders onto one invoice + Combine items from multiple orders into one shipment + Access item availability information during order entry + Create a new item while entering an order + Check inventory to automatically create a back order for out-of-stock items on shipment creation + Disallow invoices to credit-hold customers + Assign to each order the appropriate salespersons and calculate their commission + Assign the appropriate price for each item using price conversion for the base unit to the sales units + Take advantage of integrated back order processing + Use alternate item IDs for stock items + Track lot or serial numbers for valuable items on orders + More easily track returns and replacements using reason codes assigned to credit memos + Print carrier labels for RMA orders Manage defaults /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-defaults section Multiple default values that can be specified in this workspace and in the Inventory and Supplier ledger workspaces, help the users easily create new documents, process them, and minimize errors. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage defaults Multiple default values that can be specified in this workspace and in the Inventory and Supplier ledger workspaces, help the users easily create new documents, process them, and minimize errors. The default values can be set for automatic VAT calculation for sales orders, for shipment addresses and shipment processing options, and for automatic packaging suggestions. About sales VAT on sales orders and invoices /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-defaults/about-sales-vat-on-sales-orders-and-invoices page Items ordered from particular states are subject to the relevant state sales tax. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales VAT on sales orders and invoices Items ordered from particular states are subject to the relevant state sales tax. Items ordered from particular states are subject to the relevant state sales tax. The rate and the amount of sales tax depend on many factors, including the types of items purchased, the delivery address of the customer, the address of the selling branch, and the business presence of your organisation in the state of the customer. If automatic calculation of VAT is configured in your system, the system determines the applicable VAT for each sales order or invoice based on the VAT categories of the items sold and the VAT zones assigned to customer locations. To minimise VAT-related errors that users make when they enter sales orders, cash sales, and invoices, you can provide proper default values for the VAT zones used for VAT calculation, as described in this topic. ## VAT on sales orders You enter customer sales orders by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The system assigns the default VAT zone to the sales order (displayed in the **Customer VAT zone** field on the **Financial details** tab) as follows: 1. From the VAT zone specified for the quote if the order is created from a quote that has a VAT zone specified. 1. From the VAT zone of the customer location specified on the order, if specified. You can select VAT zones for customer locations in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. From the VAT zone determined by the postcode of the delivery address if no VAT zone is specified for this customer location and if the order is shipped by a common carrier. > [!NOTE] > On the order, the **Ship via** code denotes how the order is shipped. To check whether the ship via code denotes a delivery method of a common carrier, use the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. 1. From the VAT zone associated with the selling branch if no VAT zone is specified for this customer location and if the order is not shipped by a common carrier. (If the **Branch accounting** functionality is not activated in your system, the VAT zone assigned to your organisation is used.) If you know exactly which VAT zone should be used on a specific order, you can select it in the **Customer VAT zone** field from the list of all configured VAT zones. ## VAT on invoices When a sales order is shipped, the system generates an invoice. Invoices of this type have all the details copied from the associated sales orders. Also, you can manually create invoices to invoice customers for services rendered, or you can enter cash sales when the customer immediately pays for the services. You can create an invoice by using the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) or the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. Cash sales can be created in the [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) window. The system assigns the default VAT zone for the invoice or cash sale (displayed in the **Customer VAT zone** field on the **Financial details** tab) as follows: 1. From the VAT zone of the customer location specified on the document. You can select VAT zones for customer locations in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. From the VAT zone associated with the selling branch if no VAT zone is specified for this customer location. (If the **Branch accounting** functionality is not activated in your system, the VAT zone assigned to your organisation in the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window is used.) If you know exactly which VAT zone should be used on a specific invoice or a cash sale document, you can select it in the **Customer VAT zone** field from the list of all configured VAT zones.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Manage document types and work flows /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows section Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Manage document types and work flows Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations. To modify workflows for sales orders, you can use the [Sales orders preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. You can create more order types by modifying order type settings or templates if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. These topics provide descriptions of all applicable options. About predefined types of sales orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders page A sales order is an internal document that you use to record a customer's purchase order. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About predefined types of sales orders A sales order is an internal document that you use to record a customer's purchase order. Visma Net includes a variety of predefined order types (such as quotes, sales orders with allocation, and transfer orders) for common distribution operations. You can create sales orders of predefined types in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If needed, you can modify the predefined types and define custom order types to meet the specific order processing requirements in your company. You can control the steps required to process each type of sales order, from entry to shipping and invoicing. For details on custom order types, see: [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/). Most of the predefined order types are described in the remainder of this topic. The types of orders that are used for customer returns are described in: [About predefined order types for customer returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns/). ## Quote (QT) A quote is a proposal of future sales to a particular customer for a specified price. You can use documents of the **QT** order type to plan production or purchase orders. The functionality of approvals is supported for quotes (which is indicated by the selected **Supports approval** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window). The quantities of goods and the document amounts on open quotes do not update the information in the Inventory and Customer ledger workspaces. Because you can copy the information on quotes to sales orders, quotes can be used as templates for repeating orders with the same line item information for a particular customer. Freight is calculated on quotes of the predefined **QT** type. You can select whether to recalculate discounts on sales orders copied from quotes. After you copy a quote to a sales order (by selecting **Actions** - **Copy order** in the window toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window), the quote remains open until you cancel it. ## Sales order (SO) A sales order is a document with the **SO** order type that you create, possibly based on a quote, to represent a customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date. Once the order is saved, the credit history of the customer will be checked to verify that the customer has not exceeded the specified credit limits or days past due. To configure the system so that the status of the order changes to **Credit hold** if the customer fails the credit check, select the **Check credit on entry** check box on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window; by default, this check box is cleared. After approval has been configured, when a sales order is saved, it will be assigned to an approver and will get the **Pending approval** status. If it has been rejected, the order should be edited and will be reassigned for approval. If it has been approved, the order may be shipped. Sales orders of the **SO** type are fulfilled by shipments (the **Process shipments** check box is selected on the **Template settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window). For orders of the **SO** type, you must generate invoices in the Customer ledger workspace and issues in the Inventory workspace. For more details on processing, see: [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/). ## Sales order with allocation (SA) This predefined type of sales order is only available if at least one of the **Lot and serial tracking**, **Stock subitems**, **Multiple warehouse locations**, and **Sales order to purchase order link** functionalities is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. If your organisation's policies require you to reserve stock for orders from specific customers, you can use the orders of the **SA** type for these customers. When you save a new order of this type in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the specified quantities of the line items are reserved specifically for this order. You can view the allocation for each line item by selecting a line and clicking the **Allocations** button on the **Document details** tab. If there is an insufficient quantity in the specified warehouse, the system will automatically split the requested quantity into two allocation schedules: one with the available quantity reserved in the specified warehouse, and one with the remaining quantity, for which you can select another source warehouse and reserve the quantity there (by selecting the **Allocated** check box). Once an order of the **SA** type is saved, the credit history of the customer is checked to verify that the customer has not exceeded the specified credit limits or days past due. If the customer fails the credit check, the status of the order is changed to **Credit hold**. (This is controlled by the **Check credit on entry** check box, which is selected by default on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.) Sales orders of the **SA** type are fulfilled by shipments; that is, the **Process shipments** check box is selected on the **Template settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. For orders of the **SA** type, you must generate invoices in the Supplier ledger workspace and issues in the Inventory workspace. For more information on orders of this type, see: [About sales orders with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations/) and [Create a sales order with reserved allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-reserved-allocations/). ## Invoice order (IN) An invoice order, which has the **IN** order type, is a special type of sales order you create when the goods requested by a customer have been shipped already, so the processing of the orders does not involve shipments. You can set up approval for the orders of the **IN** type. For orders of this type, you must create an invoice in the Customer ledger workspace and an issue in the Inventory workspace that updates the item quantities. Customer ledger invoices are generated for invoice orders separately from invoices of the same customer based on orders of other types. For more information, see: [About invoice order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-invoice-order-processing-options/). ## Cash sales (CS) You create an order with the **CS** order type when you sell items directly to the customer (with no shipping) and receive payment at that time (by cash, check, or credit card). You can save the order of the **CS** type, which you create by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, only after you enter the payment information including the payment reference number. For orders of this type, you should create a supplier ledger document of the **Cash sales** type and an issue in the Inventory workspace. For more information, see: [About cash sales processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-cash-sales-processing-options/). ## Transfer order (TR) Transfer orders or orders with the **TR** order type are used to account for stock items moved from one warehouse to another when replenishment window the source warehouse is performed or when stock items are allocated (reserved) to fulfil sales orders in other warehouses. This order type is only available if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. In most cases, you create transfer orders by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. To generate multiple transfer orders for replenishment and for sales orders with stock allocation, you can use the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window. You can fulfill the transfer orders by shipments. For more information on transfer orders, see: [Process transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About custom order types /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types page Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations, as described in: About predefined types of sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About custom order types Visma Net provides predefined order types, such as quote, sales order, credit note, invoice order, and return for credit, for common order processing operations, as described in: About predefined types of sales orders. For more information: [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/). Each predefined order type, which is available in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window, has an associated **template**. The template is a collection of settings that controls the processing of documents of the type, including what customer ledger and inventory documents it generates, whether it requires shipment, and how the automation behaviour determines conditions for changing statuses. You can create more order types by modifying order type settings or templates if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. You can configure custom order types based on the available templates, which involves making slight changes to an order type based on the template. In exceptional cases, new custom templates can be created with the help of the Visma Net development team, and custom order types can be based on those templates. Custom order types, whether they are based on predefined templates or custom templates, appear for selection in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window along with predefined order types. Users can create new orders of custom types and process them by using the windows in the **Processing** section of the Inventory workspace in accordance with the automation behaviour configured for the template. The sections below cover order types based on both predefined templates and custom templates created by Visma Net. ## Order types based on predefined templates By using the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window, you can view the settings of predefined order types and create new custom order types based on predefined templates. (When you create an order type based on a template, the template itself cannot be modified.) New order types based on predefined templates are minor modifications of the predefined template order type. For example: You can create separate quote order types, based on the **QT (quote)** template, for the customer price classes of wholesale, retail, and catalog customers. These types might use different number series to determine order IDs and different sets of general ledger accounts and subaccounts. Also, the types might have different processing options, such as the setting that determines whether the system performs a credit check when the quotes are entered. The following order type templates are available: CM (Credit note) : The built-in template for the **CM** order type. You use documents of this type to adjust already-completed sales orders. CR (Cash return) : The built-in template for the **CR** order type. Documents of this type are used when the customer returns goods from a cash sale order with no shipping. IN (Invoice) : The built-in template for the **IN** and **CS** order types. You use documents of these types, respectively, to invoice the customer for shipped goods and to register cash sales. QT (Quote) : The built-in template for the **QT** order type. Documents of this type register the customer's intention to buy goods in the specified quantity, on the specified date, and at the specified price. RC (Return for credit) : The built-in template for the **RC** order type. You use documents of this type to register customer returns for credit without replacement. RM (Generic authorised return) : The built-in template for the **RM** order type. Documents of this type register customer returns with replacement or for credit within the product's warranty period. RR (Return with replacement) : The built-in template for the **RR** order type. You use documents of this type to register customer returns with exact replacement. SA (Sales order with allocation) : The built-in template for the **SA** order type. You create documents of this type to record customers' requests to purchase goods and to reserve the requested goods for the orders. SO (Sales order) : The built-in template for the **SO** order type. Documents of this type are created to record customers' requests to purchase goods and to prepare shipments. TR (transfer) : The built-in template for the **TR** order type. You generate documents of this type to perform stock replenishment by transferring goods from the source warehouse to a destination warehouse. This order type only appears if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. For each new order type based on one of the available templates, specify the following on the **General settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window: 1. The two-letter identifier and brief description. 1. The template to be used for the order type. Order types based on the same template usually have similar functionality. 1. The number series to be used for automatic generation of reference numbers for documents of the type. We recommend that you assign individual series with a prefix for each order type to help users track documents. 1. The number series to be used for the customer ledger document generated for each order of the type. Again, a series with a specific prefix for the order type helps users track documents more easily. 1. General ledger accounts and subaccounts, or rules for selecting accounts and subaccounts for the order type. 1. Various processing options, such as the following: + **Hold orders on entry** Whether orders should be saved with the **On hold** status when they are entered. + **Check credit on entry** Whether the system performs a credit check for the customer when the order is entered. + **Require control total** Whether the user must type in the control total on order entry and modification. + **Invoice separately** Whether the system should generate separate invoices for each order of this type. + **Calculate freight** Whether freight calculation is required on saving the orders. ## Order types based on custom templates In rare cases, a custom order type can be created based on a custom template. CAUTION: Although the **Template settings** tab is not hidden, we do not recommend that you modify the available templates. Custom templates can be created only based on settings provided by Visma Net developers. Each of the available templates is based on automation behaviour implemented in Visma Net—a set of automation steps developed for the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window and related windows involved in order processing. Automation behaviours use various built-in order and shipment plans. The following automation behaviours are available: Sales order : Implements typical sales order and transfer processing with approval. Invoice : Implements typical invoice order and cash sale order processing with approval. Quote : Implements typical quote processing with approval. Credit note : Implements typical credit memo processing. RMA order : Implements processing for typical types of customer returns: returns for credit, returns with replacement, and RMA returns. The functionality of order types is implemented through automation steps developed for each of the forms involved in order processing: the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, and the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. This functionality defines, for orders of specific types in each status, what actions are enabled and under what conditions. The settings in the **Operations** area on the **Template settings** tab of the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window affect the integration of orders with the Inventory and Customer ledger workspaces. For example: For the **RC (Return for credit)** template, the default inventory operation for receiving the returned goods will be **Receipt** in the Inventory workspace and that a credit note will be generated in the Customer ledger workspace to reimburse the customer for the returned goods. With the **RR (Return for replacement)** template, no customer ledger document will be generated for an order of the type, while in the Inventory workspace, the release of the receipt (the default inventory operation for this order type) will initiate the creation of an issue to account for the replacement sent to the customer in the same quantity with the same price.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About credit checks in the Sales workspace /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-credit-checks-in-the-sales-workspace page This topic describes the credit check settings for sales orders and invoices in the Inventory workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About credit checks in the Sales workspace This topic describes the credit check settings for sales orders and invoices in the Inventory workspace. This topic describes the credit check settings for sales orders and invoices in the Inventory workspace. ## Credit check for sales orders A credit check of the customer is performed for sales orders of most predefined types. When a user selects a customer for the order, the system performs the customer credit check. If the credit rules specified for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window have been violated (that is, if the customer has exceeded the credit limit, the days past due, or both), the system displays a yellow exclamation mark to the left of the **Customer** field. By pointing at the mark, the user can read the warning. You can use the **Hold document on failed credit check** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window to indicate to the system how the orders of the specific type should be processed if the customer fails the credit check: + If the check box is selected for the order type, when an order of this type is saved (or taken off hold, depending on whether the **Hold orders on entry** check box is selected for the order type), it will get the **Credit hold** status. + If the check box is cleared for the order type, when an order of this type is saved or taken off hold, it will get the **Open** status. The order can be processed as the orders that passed the credit check can be processed. As for the predefined order types, the **Hold document on failed credit check** check box is selected only for the orders of the **SA (Sales orders with allocation)** type. If customer payments were entered or order amounts were decreased, orders that were previously placed on credit hold can be released from it. In the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window, you can select orders with the **Credit hold** status and click **Release from credit hold** (as long as you are as a user have access to this action). This initiates credit checks for each order selected, and if the credit check is successful, the order receives a status of **Open**. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, you may need to assign the orders that have been taken from credit hold for approval as other orders. In this case, add to the approval map a condition or multiple conditions that assign the orders with **Credit hold** check box selected to specific approvers. Then on release from credit hold, the orders will get the **Pending approval** status if the conditions are met. Alternatively, you can release each order from credit hold individually by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If you as a user have access to the **Release from credit hold** action on the **Actions** menu in the window toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can click this action to change the status of the order to **Open** and process it further despite of the failed credit check. If when editing this order you increase the order amount, then when you save the order, it will get the **Credit hold** status. If you do not change the amount, you can process the order further; an invoice generated for the order will not get the **Credit hold** status (even if the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window) and can be released. ## Credit check for invoices Generally, invoices are generated for sales orders that have passed the credit check; however, you may need to perform a separate credit check for invoices and hold invoices on failed credit check. Depending on your organisation's business processes, the time range between shipment creation and invoice generation may be significant and during this time, the prices may change. Also, services and warranties may be added manually to invoices, rather than to sales orders. A credit check is performed for each new invoice that is created by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window, and if the customer fails the credit check, the system displays a yellow exclamation mark to the left of the **Customer** field and a warning. However, you may want invoices to be placed on credit hold if they fail the credit check. You can select the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check field in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window to indicate to the system that all invoices that fail the credit check should get the **Credit hold** status. For invoices with the **Credit hold** status, in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window, you can periodically perform the **Release from credit hold** action, which initiates a credit check and opens the invoices of those customers who have paid their outstanding balances fully or partially or have extended the credit limits.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About invoices in the sales workspace /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-invoices-in-the-sales-workspace page Invoices of different types that you can view and edit by using the Customer invoices (SO303000) window are actually customer ledger documents that originate in the Inventory workspace. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoices in the sales workspace Invoices of different types that you can view and edit by using the Customer invoices (SO303000) window are actually customer ledger documents that originate in the Inventory workspace. For more information: [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/). Invoices of different types that you can view and edit by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window are actually customer ledger documents that originate in the Inventory workspace. An invoice is a legally binding document that records the price and details of the sale and indicates that the order has been fulfilled. By the time an invoice is created, the goods or services have been delivered or rendered, and you may need to manually edit the document. The following types of documents can be processed by using the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/)window: + Invoices + Cash sales + Cash returns + Credit notes The sections below describe how different types of invoices created in the Inventory workspace are processed. ## Invoice processing You can create an invoice for each shipment or consolidate multiple shipment documents for the same customer into a single customer invoice in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window, or you can combine orders for an invoice manually by clicking **Add order** on the **Document details** tab of the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. You can generate an invoice for only a confirmed shipment (one with the **Confirmed** status). An invoice created in the Sales workspace has one of the following statuses: On hold : You can save an invoice with this status if you want to continue editing it. To save the invoice with the **Balanced** status, clear the **Hold** check box and save the document. If the **Validate totals** option has been selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, you first need to type the control total into the **Amount** field. Balanced : A **Balanced** invoice can be released to the Customer ledger workspace. When you release an invoice, the statuses of shipments included in the invoice change to **Invoiced**. Open : When an invoice is released to the Customer ledger workspace, it gets the **Open** status until it is paid for by the customer. Also, upon release of the invoice, the status of the original sales order changes to **Completed**. You can print the invoice (individually or among other invoices and notes) and send it to the customer by postal mail or you can send the invoice as an email or e-mail attachment depending on the mailing settings of the customer account. Closed : Once it is fully paid, the invoice gets the **Closed** status. The release of an invoice generates transactions in the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window and updates the General ledger workspace. The reference to the batch that posts transactions to the general ledger can be found on the **Financial details** tab of the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. Salespersons' commissions are calculated when the invoice is released or paid, depending on the commission settings in the [Customer ledger preferences (AR101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-ledger-preferences-ar101000/) window. Total freight charges may include premium freight, insurance, shipment, and other charges that apply to the shipped goods and to entire shipments. The premium freight amounts, which are specified for sales orders, are allocated among the shipments fulfilling the order, according to the option selected in the **Freight allocation on partial shipping** field in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, which can be one of the following: Allocate proportionally : Distributes the premium freight amount shipments proportionally to the partial shipment amounts. Full amount first time : Assigns the premium freight amount to the first shipment. ## Cash sale processing An invoice of the cash sale type is generated for a cash sale order. The document updates appropriate sales and cash accounts. ## Cash return processing An customer ledger document of the **cash return** type is generated for cash return orders that are used to account for returns on cash sales orders. The document updates appropriate sales and cash accounts. ## Credit note processing A credit note is generated when an order of the **credit note** type is fulfilled to adjust the customer's balance with the company by the amount of the returned goods. Credit notes are used for unauthorised and authorised returns. A credit note can be released to the Customer ledger workspace and can update the Inventory workspace. In the Customer invoices window, for a **Balanced** credit note, the following actions are enabled in the **Actions** menu of the toolbar: Release : Releases the **Balanced** note to the Customer ledger workspace, to credit the customer account for the returned goods. Update IN : Releases relevant data to the Inventory workspace. The stock levels will be increased in the Inventory workspace by the quantity of returned goods. The original order will get the **Completed** status once the related customer ledger credit note is released. The reference number of the batch that posted the related transactions to the General ledger workspace can be found on the **Financial details** tab in the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window. ## Reordering lines in invoices You may need to reorder invoice lines that you have added to be in a specific order requested by the customer. Also, you may need to sort invoice lines by the shipment number and order number to make it easier to review a printable invoice. You can reorder the lines of an invoice until it has been released. The order number of each invoice line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the order numbers for each document line in the **Sort order** column. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combinations, such as the following: + A single invoice line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example, lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of invoice lines (for example, line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold the **Shift** key down while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down** arrow until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of invoice lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move invoice lines between pages, cut the selected invoice lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. > [!NOTE] > You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. The invoice lines that you add by using the **Add order** dialog box are added to the table in the order in which you have added them. If you need to rearrange the lines in the table to sort them by shipment numbers and order numbers, you can click the **Reset sorting** button in the table toolbar of the **Document details** tab. When you click this button, the system automatically sorts the invoice lines and regenerates **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. ### Inserting lines into invoices You can insert a single line to any place in the document. To do this, click the line above which the new line should be inserted and then press Shift+Insert, or right-click the needed line and then click **Insert row**. The system adds a new blank line. When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About payment reservation for sales orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders page Many businesses perform sales on credit: A customer order is paid after the order has been shipped and an invoice for the shipped goods and services has been generated and sent to the customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About payment reservation for sales orders Many businesses perform sales on credit: A customer order is paid after the order has been shipped and an invoice for the shipped goods and services has been generated and sent to the customer. Many businesses perform sales on credit: A customer order is paid after the order has been shipped and an invoice for the shipped goods and services has been generated and sent to the customer. In some cases, businesses may require prepayments or payments made specifically for particular orders, or your organisation can charge a customer card for specific orders. If you rely on payment auto-application, payments are applied to unrelated invoices starting from the earliest documents and it is difficult to perform reconciliation later. With Visma Net, you can link payments to orders and orders to payments (including prepayments), thus reserving payments for particular orders. After that, once the orders are shipped, the payments will be applied to the invoices generated for the order shipments. Linking payments to orders can facilitate reconciliation. ## Linking payments to an order You can streamline your processes by entering a customer prepayment or a payment intended for a particular order directly by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. On the **Payments** tab of the window, you can click **Create payment** or **Create prepayment** to enter a payment or a prepayment, respectively. A prepayment or payment can be for a full amount or a partial amount. You can later create an additional payment for the balance or link the order to an existing payment or existing payments. Also, you can link a new order to existing prepayments or payments by selecting the available customer prepayments or payments by their reference numbers on the **Payments** tab. Moreover, you can reserve payments with balances that were already applied to unrelated invoices in the Supplier ledger workspace. ## Linking orders to a payment When you enter a customer prepayment or payment in the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)window in the Customer ledger or Inventory workspace, you can link it directly to a particular order or multiple orders by using the **Orders to apply** tab. The payments with balances that have been partially applied to invoices can also be reserved for sales orders. For customers who pay by credit cards, you can create a payment, link it to particular sales order or orders, and charge the credit card by using the same [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) window. ## Processing orders with reserved payments An order with a payment linked is processed in the same way as any other order is. An order can be fulfilled by one or multiple shipments: first shipments are created and confirmed, and then invoices are generated and released. An order can be edited until it is **Open**. If no invoice has been generated for the order, you can cancel payment application by removing the reserved payment from the list on the **Payments** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once any amount applied to an order has been transferred to the invoice generated for the order, you can view the history of application on the **Application history** tab of the [Payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/)window, which is available in both the Inventory workspace and the Customer ledger workspace. As orders linked to this payment are being shipped and completed, you will see on the **Application history** tab the list of applied invoices (generated for those orders) as it is populated. Consider a simple scenario when a full-amount payment was reserved for an order. Once the order has been shipped and an invoice has been generated and released, the payment amount is applied to the invoice and the invoice gets the **Closed** status. The payment amount that was applied to the invoice is shown as **Transferred to invoice**. The order gets the **Completed** status. If an order with a full-amount payment linked was shipped partially and then has been completed or cancelled, its unapplied balance is reset to zero while the payment with unapplied balance has the **Open** status and its applied amount is shown as **Transferred to invoice**. There may be many variations of this scenario: multiple shipments (and multiple invoices) for the order, multiple payments reserved for one order, or multiple orders paid by one prepayment. If the order is being shipped in multiple shipments, you can track how the payment's partial amounts was applied to multiple invoices. On release of invoices, the system applies the payments (in the amounts reserved for orders) to invoices, and if the amount of payments is equal to the order total, the invoices get the **Closed** status. If the total amount of payments (applied to orders) is less than the order total, one of the invoices is given the **Open** status with the balance that is equal to the difference between the order total and the payments' total. Some of the linked payments may be applied to an order partially and also applied to unrelated invoices.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Display profit and margin totals /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals page You can display or hide the unit cost and profit and margin totals in the Sales orders (SO301000) and Sales orders (SO30100S) windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Display profit and margin totals You can display or hide the unit cost and profit and margin totals in the Sales orders (SO301000) and Sales orders (SO30100S) windows. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/), [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). See the table below on how this is done for each window. |Window|Action| |---|---| |[Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/)|Go to the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, the **General settings** tab, and select or deselect the **Show gross margin/profit** check box.| |[Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/)|Remove or add the **Sales Profit Viewer** role for the user you want to hide or display the information for.| Change customer location on customer invoice /visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/change-customer-location-on-customer-invoice section In Visma Net, you can change the customer location on a customer invoice, even when it already has lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer location on customer invoice In Visma Net, you can change the customer location on a customer invoice, even when it already has lines. If you want to change the customer location to one with a different VAT calculation, on an invoice with lines, consider the following to make sure the VAT calculation is changed as well. ## Before you start Make sure the **Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document** check box in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window is selected. See also: [Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/set-up-calculation/recalculate-vat-when-customer-is-changed-on-document/). 1. Make sure that the **Export type** is filled in for the location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. 1. In the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window on the invoice, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Location** field and select a new location. **Result**: the **VAT details** tab and the VAT category on the lines will be updated accordingly if the new location has a different VAT calculation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure automatic packaging /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging section Visma Net provides options that give your company the ability to configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for the sales orders and shipments to be shipped, either via carriers with which integration is established or via other carriers whose delivery services your company uses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure automatic packaging Visma Net provides options that give your company the ability to configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for the sales orders and shipments to be shipped, either via carriers with which integration is established or via other carriers whose delivery services your company uses. You can set up the application to calculate a set of boxes for each sales order and shipment and calculate the freight. > [!NOTE] > To use this functionality, make sure the **Automatic packaging** is enabled in [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. With this functionality disabled, you will need to manually select all the boxes for sales orders and shipments and specify the gross weights of the resulting packages. About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers page With Visma Net, you can configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for all the carriers used by your organisation to ship the sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers With Visma Net, you can configure and use the automatic packaging functionality for all the carriers used by your organisation to ship the sales orders. > [!NOTE] > To use this functionality, make sure **Automatic packaging** is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. With this functionality enabled and configured, the system will determine the optimal set of boxes (packages) for each sales order and shipment and calculate the freight. For detailed instructions, see: [Configure automatic packaging](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-automatic-packaging/). ## Package calculation for a sales order Once the automatic packaging functionality has been configured, you can use it when you prepare a sales order for shipping or create a consolidated shipment. Because the calculation of packages is resource-intensive, the system calculates packages only when the user requests this calculation. As you are preparing a sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window and adding items, the system calculates the weight and volume of the sales order. Once you specify the delivery information on the **Delivery settings** tab, including the ship via code, the shipping terms, and the shipping zone, and save the order, the system determines the set of boxes, each package weight, the freight cost, and the freight charges. The system uses a heuristic algorithm (an algorithm that quickly finds a satisfactory set of boxes, however it does not guarantee that this set is the best one) and the following information to make suggestions about the boxes required for the order: + The lists of boxes assigned to each ship via code, with the maximum weight and volume each box can hold and the weight of the box (which must include the weight of any packaging material) + The quantity of each stock item in base units, the weight and volume of the base unit of the item, and the option instructing the system about how to pack this item + The quantity of each non-stock item in base units, and the weight and volume of the base unit of the item You can view the particular packages in the **Shop for rates** dialog box, which opens when you click the **Packages** button on the **Delivery settings** tab. You can review the calculated totals on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If freight for a specific ship via code should be specified manually, you can enter the total freight amount in the **Freight** field on the **Totals** tab. In some cases, you may need to edit the packages manually. If you select the **Manual packaging** check box, you can adjust information about the boxes and their contents to match the quantities and weights of actual packages. > [!NOTE] > For packages > that have been suggested automatically (those with **Auto**selected in the > **Type**column), the system adds the weights of the boxes automatically. > > For each box that is added manually, you must specify the gross weight of the box. ## Package calculation for a shipment Once a shipment is generated for a sales order, the system updates the packages calculated for the order (if needed), and information about particular boxes used for the shipment becomes available for review on the **Packages** tab. If needed, you can adjust the packages manually: correct the gross weights of particular packages, or select another box (or other boxes) to match the quantities and weights of the actual packages. ## Package calculation for consolidated shipments You can create shipments for multiple orders by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. If multiple orders are consolidated into one shipment, you can recalculate the packages initially determined for sales orders by clicking the **Refresh packages** button in the toolbar on the **Packages** tab of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Once the set of boxes is determined for the consolidated shipment, you can review and edit this list if needed on the **Packages** tab. ## Manual packaging for specific items You can specify that certain items should always be packed manually; for example, if the items are small and can fit into a box packed with other items. To exclude such items from automatic packaging, you should select **Manual** in the **Packaging option** field in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window (on the **Packaging** tab). Then when preparing a sales order with such items in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you will need to select the boxes to be used to ship these items on the **Shop for rates** dialog box, specify their gross weights and the declared values in the **Packages** table. Recalculation of these packages will not be performed automatically for this order and that these particular packages will be used for shipping (even if the order is a part of a consolidated shipment).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About freight calculation /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation page With Visma Net, you can manage freight to better control any additional costs and revenues on sales transactions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About freight calculation With Visma Net, you can manage freight to better control any additional costs and revenues on sales transactions. With Visma Net, you can manage freight to better control any additional costs and revenues on sales transactions. The freight amount you charge your customers may include not only the freight your company is charged by carriers, but also insurance, handling, and packaging fees defined by your shipping terms and premium freight. You can define for each sales order type whether freight will be calculated automatically by selecting the **Calculate freight** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. Your company may use shipping services provided by various carriers or provide its own shipping services. The freight amount you charge your customers is calculated as the sum of the following: + The freight amount, which is calculated by applying shipping terms to the freight cost + The premium freight amount (if any) The actual amounts of freight and handling may differ from the anticipated cost; the actual cost becomes known only after the shipment is completed or the shipments (if the order may be split into multiple shipments) are completed. ## Freight cost calculated for non-integrated carriers If the goods for a sales order are shipped under a ship via code associated with a non-integrated carrier, the system estimates the freight cost based on the rates defined by the ship via code. You specify rates for each ship via code based on a non-integrated carrier on the **Freight rates** tab of the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, refer to: [Create a ship via code](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/create-a-ship-via-code/). The number of decimal places for freight rates is defined by the value in the **Price/cost decimal places** field in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window. When a user enters a sales order to be shipped by a non-integrated carrier, the system estimates the freight cost for the order based on the ship via code, that is, the predefined rates you have specified for the carrier. The weight of each order is calculated automatically in the same weight UoM that is specified in the **Weight UoM** field in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. For details on setting up the order weight calculation, see: [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/). By default, the currency of the freight is the currency of the sales order; however, you can manually change the currency of the freight or exchange rate for a particular shipment on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Shipments - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Rates are specified for shipping zones based on total shipment weight and, optionally, volume. The weight of an order is compared to break points, and the first one that is less than the order weight gives the freight rate. The system calculates the freight cost depending on the calculation method you have selected in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window for the carrier, **Per unit** or **Net**, with calculations as shown below: + For the **Per unit** calculation method: `FreightCost = BaseRate + (FreightRate x Weight)` + For the **Net** calculation method: Here, FreightRate is equal to the rate defined for a specific range of shipment weight and volume, as specified on the **Freight rates** tab of the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. `FreightCost = BaseRate + FreightRate` For the ship via code of the carrier, if **Manual** is selected as the freight calculation method in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, then when preparing a sales order, you should specify the freight amount in the **Freight cost** field on the **Totals** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## Freight amount to be charged Once the freight cost to be charged for the sales order shipped under a specific ship via code is known or estimated (for the codes associated with non-integrated carriers), the system applies the shipping terms used for relations with the customer, as assigned in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window, to calculate the full freight amount for the order to be paid by the customer. The freight amount may include insurance, handling fees, or line handling fees. The account to be used to record freight for sales orders of a specific type is defined by the option selected in the **Use freight account from** field in the [Shipping terms (CS208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000/) window. The default freight account is also specified in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window; this account is used when the **Use freight account from** option points to an unavailable account. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the freight subaccount to record freight is generated according to the rule specified in the **Combine freight sub. from** field in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. To encourage larger orders, you can configure the shipping terms so that the customers will not pay freight on orders with amounts greater than a specified value. In the [Shipping terms (CS208000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000/) window, the level of charges is defined by a sequence of break points based on shipping amount. For ship via codes with **Manual** selected as the freight calculation method, the freight amount is equal to the freight cost entered manually on the **Totals** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The freight amount is calculated similarly for all ship via codes, as shown below. `FreightAmt = (FreightCost x FreightCost% / 100)` ## Premium freight amount to be charged to customers The premium freight amount is specified for a sales order as a flat amount on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The premium freight amount can be any additional handling flat fee that originates during the processing of the sales order due to the order's properties or circumstances, for example, extreme fragility or extreme dimensions, volume, or weight. If you need to correct the excessive freight charges that were specified in one of the earlier orders, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order by decreasing it by the adjustment amount or by entering a negative freight amount. Notice that the order's total amount, which results from adjusting the premium freight amount, must be greater than zero or, at least, equal to zero. Otherwise, the invoice that is later generated for the order cannot be released. ## Freight allocation on shipments A sales order can be fulfilled by multiple shipments if it is allowed for the order, and with multiple shipments, your company can define how the freight amount should be allocated among shipments: Use the **Freight allocation on partial shipping** field, located on the **General settings** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, and select one of the following options: Full amount first time : to assign the freight amount to the first shipment created for the order Allocate proportionally : to distribute the freight amount among shipments proportionally to partial shipment amounts Notice that on shipments shipped with ship via codes for which **Manual** is selected as the freight calculation method, you can edit the freight amounts. ## Recognising freight costs as freight expenses The freight cost determined for a sales order is not recorded to any expense account until an invoice from the carrier is processed. An invoice from the carrier may include freight charges for all the sales orders that were shipped by the carrier during a specific time interval (a week, two weeks, or a month). If the invoices are created for each ship via code used for shipping, the Freight expense account specified in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window can be manually selected on the appropriate lines of the invoice. ## VAT applicable to freight sales For each ship via code defined for the shipping options provided by your company (with the **Common carrier** check box cleared), in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, you can specify the VAT category that applies to freight as to additional service provided by your company. The list of VAT applicable to the freight will include the VAT that are present both in the VAT category and in the VAT zone of the branch that sold the goods. If the goods are shipped by a common carrier, the VAT category is applied only to the amount of freight in excess of freight cost, and the list of VAT applied to the specified amount is the VAT from both the VAT category and the VAT zone of the customer's delivery address (the specified VAT zone of the customer location or, if not specified, the VAT zone automatically determined by the delivery address's post code). ## Further freight adjustments However, the real cost of freight and handling becomes known only after all shipments are completed and actual shipping charges for all packages have been provided by the carrier. If you need to correct the excessive freight charges that were specified in one of the earlier orders, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order by decreasing it by the adjustment amount or by entering a negative freight amount. If you need to adjust the **Total freight amt.** in an invoice, you can specify the needed positive or negative **Premium freight amt.** in the shipment line on the **Freight details** tab. Notice that the order's total amount, which results from adjusting the premium freight amount, must be greater than zero or at least equal to zero; otherwise, the invoice that is generated later for the order cannot be released. Create a ship via code /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/create-a-ship-via-code section In Visma Net, you can create a ship via code for each delivery service your organisation uses and specify which boxes are used for this service and what the freight rates are. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a ship via code In Visma Net, you can create a ship via code for each delivery service your organisation uses and specify which boxes are used for this service and what the freight rates are. In Visma Net, you can create a ship via code for each delivery service your organisation uses and specify which boxes are used for this service and what the freight rates are. You can use this window to create ship via codes. Perform the following steps for each ship via code you need to define. 1. Go to the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. 1. Enter the ship via code (which is an alphanumerical string of up to 15 characters) clearly identifying the specific delivery service. 1. Enter a description of the code. 1. On the **Details** tab, select the calendar that provides information about this carrier's work hours. 1. Select the method to calculate the freight from the following options: + **Per unit**: To calculate the freight as the rate by weight. + **Net**: To use flat rate. + **Manual**: To specify the freight amount manually for each sales order in the **Freight cost** field on the **Totals** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. In the **Base rate** field, if **Net** is selected as the calculation method, type the value of the flat-rate charge to be added to the freight amount. If **Per unit** is selected as the calculation method, type the value of the per unit rate. 1. On the **Freight rates** tab, if **Net** is selected as the calculation method, specify the rate ranges as follows: 1. Click **Add row** on the table toolbar to add a new rate range. 1. In the **Rate** column, specify the rate. 1. In the **Weight** column, specify the minimum weight to which the rate may be applied. 1. In the **Volume** column, specify the minimum volume to which the rate may be applied. 1. In the **Zone ID** column, specify the shipping zone to which the goods with the specified weight and volume are shipped. 1. In the **VAT code** field, select the VAT category to be applied to the freight charges. 1. In the **Freight sales account** field, select an income account to record the freight sales. 1. In the **Freight sales sub.** field, select a subaccount to record the freight sales. 1. In the **Freight expense account** field, select an income account to record the freight expenses. 1. In the **Freight expense sub.** field, select a subaccount to record the freight expenses. 1. On the **Packages** tab, select each of the boxes to be used with this delivery service as follows: + Click **Add row** in the toolbar to add information about a box. + In the **Box ID** column, select a box that is used by the service method. + Click **Save** in the toolbar. The box information will appear in the appropriate columns. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure a stock item for automatic packaging /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-a-stock-item-for-automatic-packaging section To enable the system to determine optimal packages for any sales order or shipment, you must specify packaging settings for each stock item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure a stock item for automatic packaging To enable the system to determine optimal packages for any sales order or shipment, you must specify packaging settings for each stock item in the Stock items (IN202500) window. For more information: [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/). To enable the system to determine optimal packages for any sales order or shipment, you must specify packaging settings for each stock item in the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is not enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can use these settings for the calculation of weight and volume of each sales order and shipment, and users will be able to select the boxes for each order manually. ## Before you proceed 1. In the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, make sure that the base weight UoM is selected in the **Weight UoM** field and that the base volume UoM is selected in the **Volume UoM** field. 1. In the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window, make sure that the UoM to measure the weight of the item's base unit is defined and that a conversion factor to convert this UoM to the base weight UoM is specified. Also, make sure that the UoM to measure the volume of the item's base unit is defined and that the conversion factor to convert this UoM to the base volume UoM is specified. ## Configure a stock item for automatic packaging 1. Go to the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window. 1. In the **Item ID** field, select a stock item. 1. In the **Weight** field on the **Packages** tab, type the weight of the base unit of the item. 1. In the **Weight UoM** field, select the UoM used to measure the weight. 1. In the **Volume** field, type the volume of the base unit of the item. 1. In the **Volume UoM** field, select the UoM used to measure the volume. 1. If this item should always be packed separately from other items, select the **Pack separately** check box. 1. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is not enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, proceed to Step 10. 1. In the **Packaging option** field, select one of the available options: + **Manual** If the item should always be packed manually. + **By weight** If the item should be packed by weight. In the **Boxes** table (which appears), create a list of boxes that can be used for this item. + **By quantity** If the item should always be packed by quantity. An item to be packed by quantity is always packed separately from other items. (When you select this option, the **Pack separately** check box is selected and unavailable for editing.) In the **Boxes** table (which appears when you select this option), create the list of boxes, and for each box, specify the maximum quantity of the base units of this item that this box can hold. + **By weight and volume** If the item can be packed by weight or volume jointly with other items from a sales order. In the **Boxes** table (which appears when you select this option), create the list of boxes that can be used for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Configure automatic packaging /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-automatic-packaging section To make sales order processing more effective, you can configure the system to automatically determine the optimal set of boxes for sales orders and for shipments to be sent via carriers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Configure automatic packaging To make sales order processing more effective, you can configure the system to automatically determine the optimal set of boxes for sales orders and for shipments to be sent via carriers. Configuration includes the following major steps. ## Before you proceed Make sure the **Automatic packaging** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. ## 1. Create the weight and volume UoMs Start by compiling a list of the units of measure used in your system to measure weights and volumes for different stock items that are usually shipped via carriers. Then make sure that all these UoMs are defined in the system in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. If any UoM is not listed among the predefined UoMs, define it. For details, see: [Define weight UoMs](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/define-weight-uoms/). ## 2. Specify the base UoMs to measure weights and volumes Decide on the base unit of measure (UoM) to be used for weight and the base unit of measure to be used for volume in your system. For more information, see: [About units of weight and volume](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-inventory-defaults/about-units-of-weight-and-volume/). After you have created the UoMS that you planned to use as the base UoMs for weights and volumes, you use the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window to select these UoMs as the base weight and volume UoMs as follows: 1. Go to the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. 1. In the **Weight UoM** field, specify the UoM to be used to measure the weights of the stock items. 1. In the **Volume UoM** field, specify the UoM to be used to measure the volumes of the stock items. 1. Click **![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png)**. ## 3. Specify the rule for converting the base UoM to the carrier UoM for weight Make sure that the conversion rules from the base weight UoM to the UoM (which is equal to the carrier unit of weight) are defined in the [Units of measure (CS203100)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/common-settings-windows/units-of-measure-cs203100/) window. ## 4. Define the boxes to be used for shipping To make it possible for the system to make packaging suggestions for sales orders, in the [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) window, list all the available boxes with their own weights (which may include the weight of all packaging materials) and their capacities for weight and volume. Linear dimensions for boxes are optional and for information purposes only. The values are not used in any calculation. For details, see: [Define a box](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/define-a-box/). ## 5. Create ship via codes and assign boxes For each delivery service used by your organization, create a ship via code by using the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window, specify the freight calculation method and freight rates, and create a list of boxes on the **Packages** tab. The rates of different carriers or different delivery services for boxes of the same capacity may vary significantly, and some services may be available for only packages with specific weights, volumes, or dimensions. For more details, see: [Create a ship via code](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/create-a-ship-via-code/). ## 6. Configure stock items for automatic packaging For each stock item, on the **Packaging settings** tab of the [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window, specify the weight and volume of the base unit and the packaging option that defines how this stock item should be packed: + By quantity, separately from other items + By weight, separately from other items + By weight, not necessarily separately from other items + By weight and volume, generally with other items + Manually For detailed instructions, see: [Configure a stock item for automatic packaging](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/configure-a-stock-item-for-automatic-packaging/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Define a box /visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/define-a-box section To send shipments via different delivery services and carriers, you need to define the types of boxes used by each of the carriers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Define a box To send shipments via different delivery services and carriers, you need to define the types of boxes used by each of the carriers. To send shipments via different delivery services and carriers, you need to define the types of boxes used by each of the carriers. 1. Go to the [Packaging types (CS207600)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/packaging-types-cs207600/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) on the table toolbar to add a new line to the table. 1. Type a unique ID for the box. 1. In the **Weight UoM** box, select the UoM to be used to measure the weight. 1. Specify the weight of the box in the selected UoM. 1. Specify the maximum weight the box can hold. 1. In the **Volume UoM** box, select the UoM to be used to measure the volume of the box. 1. Specify the capacity of the box in volume UoMs. 1. Specify the maximum volume that the box can hold. 1. Optional: specify the linear dimensions (such as width, height, or length) for information purposes only; the values are not used in any calculation. 1. Specify a description for this box. 1. Make sure the **Active by default** check box is selected for the box, if boxes of this type are used for shipping by most of the carriers and should appear by default on the list of boxes used for any ship via code in the [Ship via codes (CS207500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/ship-via-codes-cs207500/) window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Process sales orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders section Customer purchase orders are entered into the system as sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process sales orders Customer purchase orders are entered into the system as sales orders. Customer purchase orders are entered into the system as sales orders. Sales order fulfillment workflow depends on the organisation's business and may involve reservation of stock for specific orders, transfers of the stock from wholesale warehouses, back ordering of the stock that is not available, purchasing specific items directly to sales orders, or drop shipments. These topics describe the general order processing options available in Visma Net and processing options for some of the predefined order types. Work with sales orders (new) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/work-with-sales-orders-new section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Work with sales orders (new) The new [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window is under construction. New functionality is added continuously, but already implemented functionality works as it should. To see which functionality is already implemented, what is in progress and still to come, click the **Road map** icon ![road map](/media/visma-net-erp/roadmap.png). If you are working with an order and are missing functionality, you can switch to the classic window and continue there. Click the **Open in classic window** button to open the same order number in the classic window. ## Differences between classic and new window Below an overview of existing functions that are in a different place in the new window compared to the classic window: |Functionality|Classic window|New window| |---|---|---| |**Create shipment**|**Actions**|Window footer| |**Currency**|Top part|**Financial settings** tab| |**Delete order**|Window toolbar|**Actions**| |**Notes**|Window toolbar|Top part| |Print order/quote|**Reports**|Window footer ( **Preview document** button)| |Quantities per order line|Table footer after selection of order line|Columns in table **Order lines** tab| |**Ship via**|**Delivery settings** tab|Top part| |Set order statuses|**Actions** / **Hold** check box in top part|Status selectable directly in status field| ## More guides + [Change the order status](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-the-order-status/) + [Create a sales order (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-new/) + [Create a shipment](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-shipment/) + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) + [Hide and rearrange columns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/hide-and-rearrange-columns/) + [Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/mark-line-for-purchasing-and-create-purchase-order/) + [Print, email or export an order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/print-email-or-export-an-order/) + [Update a column for all order lines](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/salespersons/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines/) About shipping rules /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules page The shipping rules specified for a particular sales order define how the goods for the sales order should be shipped; whether they should be shipped only in full or partial shipments for the available quantities are allowed. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About shipping rules The shipping rules specified for a particular sales order define how the goods for the sales order should be shipped; whether they should be shipped only in full or partial shipments for the available quantities are allowed. The shipping rules specified for a particular sales order define how the goods for the sales order should be shipped; whether they should be shipped only in full or partial shipments for the available quantities are allowed. The shipment rules for a sales order are applied when you create a shipment for the order manually by using the **Create shipment** action in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, or automatically, by running the **Create shipments** process from the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. ## Shipping rule options In the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can specify the shipping rule for the sales order document as a whole (the **Shipping rule** field on the **Delivery settings** tab) and for each order line (in the **Shipping rule** column on the **Document details** tab). The document-level rule is inserted by default for each line of the order, but you can change the rule for any line as needed. You can specify any of the following shipping rule options for order lines and for orders: + **Back orders allowed** + **Cancel remainder** + **Ship only when complete** The shipping rules applied to order lines are explained in the following table.
Shipping rule option Result
Back orders allowed

The item specified in the line can be included in a shipment if any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping. The remaining quantity (if applicable) is shown as the Open quantity on the line. The ordered quantity can be shipped in multiple shipments.

The line gets the Completed status once the full ordered quantity has been shipped.

Note

If you have classes of stock items for which negative quantity is allowed and if you do not want to rely completely on availability data, select the Add zero lines for items which are not in stock check box in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window. Then, for order lines with the Back orders allowed shipping rule, a zero-quantity line will be added to the shipment if the item is not in stock, and you will be able to manually enter the actually available quantity of the item.

Cancel remainder

The item specified in the line can be included in a shipment if any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping.

With this shipping rule, shipping for the line is performed only once. After this shipment has been confirmed, the line is marked as Completed, and the Open quantity value is set to zero.

Ship only when complete

The item specified in the line can be included in a shipment only if the full ordered quantity is available for shipping. After this shipment has been confirmed, the line has the Completed status in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.

If the quantity of the item that is available for shipping is less than the ordered quantity, then the item in this line is not included in the shipment. The ordered quantity is shown as the Open quantity, and the line remains Open.

See the table below for details about how the shipping rule of a sales order affects the automatic processing of the sales order (performed by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window). > [!NOTE] > If you initiate shipment creation manually (by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window) and the system detects the shortage of the items, the system displays the message informing you that the order cannot be shipped in full so that you can make an appropriate decision on the fulfillment of this order and either change the quantities, or create a partial shipment, or change the order status to **Back order** manually.
Document-level rule Result
Ship only when complete

If shipping cannot be performed for each line of the order, no shipment is created, and the order gets the Back order status.

The shipment is created (and the order gets the Shipping status) if shipping can be performed for each line; that is, if the lines meet the following criteria:

  • For each Ship only when complete line The ordered quantity is available for shipping and can be shipped in full.
  • For each Cancel remainder line Any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping.
  • For each Back orders allowed line Any non-zero quantity that is equal to or less than the ordered quantity is available for shipping.

You cannot specify different Requested on dates for different lines in the order.

When the shipment has been confirmed, the order gets the Completed status if all the lines have the Completed status. If any line is not completed, the order gets the Back order status.

Cancel remainder

If shipping cannot be performed for any of the order lines, no shipment is created, and the order gets the Back order status.

If full or partial shipping can be performed for at least one line (according to the line’s shipping rule), the shipment is created.

You cannot specify different Requested on dates for different lines in the order.

When the shipment has been confirmed, the order gets the Completed status if at least one line has the Completed status and the lines not included in shipment have the Cancel remainder rule. The order gets the Back order status if at least one line is not completed (that is, if it has non-zero open quantity).

Back orders allowed

If shipping cannot be performed for any of the order lines, no shipment is created, and the order gets the Back order status.

You can specify different Requested on dates for different lines in the order and get the different lines shipped on different dates.

Note

If you change the Requested on date for the order, the system will prompt you to choose whether you want to keep the dates specified for each line or to update the respective dates with the new Requested on date.

If full or partial shipping can be performed for at least one line according to the line’s shipping rule, the shipment is created.

After the shipment has been confirmed, the order gets the Back order status if other lines are not completed.

## Examples of the application of shipping rules The table below presents the examples that illustrate how the shipping rules specified for the sales order and its lines affect the fulfillment of the order. Assume this order has the following lines: + Line 1: **Product 1** with an ordered quantity of 150 + Line 2: **Product 2** with an ordered quantity of 100 Each row of the table shows a combination of shipping rules: + The first column displays the rule specified for the sales order as a whole. + The second column displays the rules specified for the lines of the sales orders. + The third column displays the quantity of each product that is available for shipping in the example in the row. + The fourth column displays, for the particular shipping rules and available quantities, the result of and conditions. + The table includes enough combinations to give you an idea how these settings work together without covering an overwhelming amount of detail. |Document-level rule|Shipping rules for order lines|Qty. available for shipping|Result| |---|---|---|---| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Ship only when complete|+ 300 + 2000|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1** and 100 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Ship only when complete|+ 300 + 99|No shipment is created, and the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel Remainder|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1**, and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Ship only when complete**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Back orders allowed|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1**, and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Cancel remainder**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 300 + 0|A shipment is created that includes only one line (150 of **Product 1** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Cancel remainder**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 100 + 50|A shipment is created that includes only one line (50 of **Product 2**), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Cancel remainder**|+ Line 1: Cancel remainder + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 0 + 0|No shipment is created and the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Back orders allowed**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Cancel remainder|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1** and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the sales order gets the **Completed** status.| |**Back orders allowed**|+ Line 1: Ship only when complete + Line 2: Back orders allowed|+ 300 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (150 of **Product 1** and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the order gets the **Back order** status.| |**Back orders allowed**|+ Line 1: Cancel remainder + Line 2: Back orders allowed|+ 100 + 50|A shipment is created that includes both lines (100 of **Product 1** and 50 of **Product 2** ), and the sales order gets the **Shipping** status. On shipment confirmation, the sales order gets the **Back order** status.| ## Shipment thresholds You can use under-shipment and over-shipment thresholds, in addition to shipping rules, to determine whether a shipment results in changing the status of the sales order line to **Completed**. On the **Document details** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, for each line of a sales order, you can specify whether under-shipment and over-shipment are allowed as follows: + To allow over-shipment, you enter in the **Over-ship. threshold (%)** column a value greater than 100 (meaning 100%). For an order line with the **Ship only when complete** shipping rule for 100 yards of fabric, you might opt to have the whole lap shipped (a lap of fabric has 100 metres, and each metre is 1.093 yards). To do this, you can specify the over-shipment threshold at 110%, which allows up to 10% more fabric than the ordered amount to be shipped. + To allow under-shipment, you enter in the **Under-ship. threshold (%)** a value that is less than 100 (meaning 100%). Suppose that when you create a shipment, for an order line with the **Back orders allowed** shipping rule, the system detects a small shortage of goods, for example, only 99 units are available for shipping and 100 have been ordered. If the line's under-shipment threshold was specified at 99% or lower, the 99 units for the line will be included in the shipment, the line will be marked as **Completed**, and no open quantity will be left on the line for a back order. > [!NOTE] > If 100(%) is specified in both these columns, it means that under-shipment or over-shipment are not allowed. ## Default values for shipping rules You can set up default values to be used for shipping rules on sales orders and order lines. During the implementation process or at any time after, you can specify the shipping rule for each customer class in the **Default delivery settings** section on the **General settings** tab of the [Customer classes (AR201000/AR2010PL)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-classes-ar201000/) window. Then when you create a new customer account for a customer of this class, the customer will get the default shipping rule value along with other default values from the customer class. For each customer, the shipping rule is specified on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window. When you create a sales order and select the customer, the sales order automatically gets the default shipping rule you specified for the customer. If the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the customer locations generally get the default shipping rule values from the customer accounts. If needed, you can specify different default shipping rules for different locations of the customer. ## Default shipping rules for transfer orders Because transfer orders are created to account for transfers between warehouses, and warehouses are assigned to branches, the default shipping rules can be specified for branches on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About sales order processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options page In Visma Net, you can control the steps required to process your sales orders, from entry to shipping and invoicing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales order processing options In Visma Net, you can control the steps required to process your sales orders, from entry to shipping and invoicing. In Visma Net, you can control the steps required to process your sales orders, from entry to shipping and invoicing. In general, the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window is the starting point for entering and processing sales orders of the **SO** type. The specific procedures of this process depend on your organisation's requirements. ## Entering a sales order A sales order of the **SO** type is created to represent a customer request to buy goods in a specified quantity on a specified date. In a typical distribution organisation, the customer order may be taken over the phone or received by e-mail. Alternatively, if sales quotes are involved in your sales process, quotes can be used as templates for repeating orders for a particular customer. In this case, you can create sales orders by copying the quotes. To copy a quote to a sales order, you use the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window: Once you have selected the quote, select **Copy order** in the **Actions** menu. You can select whether to recalculate discounts on sales orders copied from quotes. After you copy a quote to a sales order, the quote remains open until you cancel it. New orders of the **SO** type will be saved with the **On hold** status by default, if the **Hold orders on entry** check box is selected for this order type on the status depends in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. A reference numbers for new orders are generated according to the number series assigned to this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. A new sales order of the **SO** type is created by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For a sales order, you specify the following information: + The customer, its location, and its tax information (VAT zone and VAT registration ID) > [!NOTE] > To facilitate order processing and tracking, you can attach scanned images or electronic versions of original customer orders to sales orders. + The payment terms + The payment method, if it is different from the default one + The shipping rule for the order and for each order line + The shipping terms + The carrier to be used for shipping + The included stock and non-stock items with their quantities, units of measure, and unit prices For items that have lot or serial numbers tracked in Visma Net, you can specify these numbers, thus reserving these particular items for the sales order. For each line selected on the **Details** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, you can view the item availability information at the bottom of the window. If you notice that the ordered goods are not available, you can select the **Actions** - **Place on back order** action for the order. If the ordered items are out of stock at the shipping warehouse only, you can split order lines into multiple allocation schedules to fulfill the order by transfers from other warehouses. To ensure that your order will be fulfilled in a timely fashion, you can reserve the specified item quantities for the order (by marking them as allocated). For details on creating a sales order (of the SO type), see: [Create a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order/) and [Create a sales order (SO) with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-allocations/). ## Reordering lines in sales orders You may need to reorder a sales order's lines, for example, if you need the lines of the printed document to be in a specific order, or if the customer wants you to sort the document lines in some custom order. Also, you may need to reorder a line or multiple lines in the existing sales order, or add a new line at the beginning of a list or in the middle of the list. You can reorder the lines of a sales order until it has been completed. The order number of each sales order line on the **Document details** tab is shown in the **Sort order** column (which is hidden by default). Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for each document line. You can select the lines to be reordered in any combinations, such as the following: + A single sales order line (for example, line 3 or 8). To select a single line, click it. + Multiple non-contiguous lines (for example, lines 1, 3, and 7). To select these lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. + A contiguous group of sales order lines (for example, line 5 through line 9). To select a group of lines, select the first line in the group, and hold the **Shift** key down while clicking the last line in the group. (Alternatively, you can click the first line and then press **Shift+Down** arrow until all the needed lines are selected.) + A non-contiguous group of sales order lines (for example, line 5 through line 7, and line 10). To select a non-contiguous group of lines, hold the **Ctrl** key down while clicking the row selector next to the needed lines. All selected lines are grouped, and thus are moved contiguously, even if you have selected multiple non-contiguous document lines. After you have selected the needed lines, move them to the new place in the table in one of the following ways: + Drag the selected line or lines to the place where you want to move them. A thin red line between the table lines shows where these lines will be inserted. Once you drag the selected lines, the system moves these lines and regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all the lines in the table. + When you need to move sales order lines between pages, cut the selected sales order lines and paste them to the new place in the table. To cut the lines, press **Ctrl+X**, or right-click the table and then click **Cut row**. Then click the line above which the cut lines should be inserted, and press **Ctrl+V**; alternatively, you can right-click the table, and then click **Insert cut row**. Once you reorder the lines, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** number for each document line. These numbers are used for numbering lines in the printable reports, such as printable sales order shown in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. You can cancel the line reordering by clicking **Cancel** in the window toolbar before you save these changes. > [!NOTE] > You cannot rearrange lines in the table if custom sorting by any column is applied to the table. ## Inserting lines into sales orders You can insert a single line to any place in the document. To do this, click the line above which the new line should be inserted and then press **Shift+Insert**, or right-click the needed line and then click **Insert row**. The system adds a new blank line. When you finish populating the line information and save your changes, the system automatically regenerates the **Sort order** numbers for all lines in the table. ## Changing the customer number in sales orders You may start to create a sales order by copying and pasting another sales order, which you use as a template. In such a case, you need to change the customer number specified for the sales order to another one. You can change the customer number in the **Customer** field of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window for a sales order that has one of the following statuses: + **On hold** + **Open** (if the order is new) + **Credit hold** (if the order is new) + **Back order** (if the new order has been placed on back order manually) When you change the customer number in the sales order, the system preserves the following information: + Order type, order number, and description + Currency ID, currency rate type, and currency rate + Document date and date when the customer wants to receive the goods + Order-level shipping rule, and shipping rules in the order lines + Item IDs and warehouses specified in the order lines + Hard allocations of inventory + Notes, activities, and attachments When you change the customer number in the sales order, the system updates the following document settings by using the settings of the newly selected customer: + Credit verification status + Salesperson commissions + Customer-specific settings on the **Document details**, **Financial settings**, **Payment settings**, and **Delivery settings** tabs + VAT and freight VAT category + Group and document discounts + Unit prices, except manual unit prices for which the **Manual price** check box is selected in the document line + Line discounts, except manual line discounts for which the **Manual discount** check box is selected in the document line The system does not automatically save the document after you change the customer number, so you can easily cancel these changes. There are some restrictions on changing the customer in a sales order. You cannot save the customer change in a sales order in any of the following cases: + The sales order has the **Open** status and is subject for approval. + The sales order has a linked shipment, invoice, IN issue, or drop-ship purchase order. + Credit card payments have been authorised or captured for the sales order. + Customer ledger payments or prepayments have been applied to the sales order. + The currency of the newly selected customer differs from the currency that was previously specified in the sales order, and the system cannot override the currency in the sales order. (This could happen if the currency override is not allowed for the newly selected customer.) > [!NOTE] > You can also change the customer number in a return orders that does not have lines linked to invoices and in a sales quote that is not linked to a sales order. To avoid situations when the system does not allow you to override the customer, we recommend that you create order templates by currency and by each unique set of shipping rules, to make sure that shipments are processed as expected. ## Specifying the shipping rules The way the order will be fulfilled depends on the shipping rules specified for the order and for each line of the order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The shipping rule specified for a line on the **Details** tab defines whether the stock item should be shipped only with the full ordered quantity or it can be shipped partially in one shipment or multiple shipments. For detailed information, see: [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). The sales order has a default shipping rule if a rule has been specified for the customer in the [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) window or for the customer location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window (if the **Business account locations** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window). If there is a default shipping rule for the customer or customer location, the system inserts the default rule for the order for each line of the order; however, you can override the shipping rule for any line and for the order if needed. ## Holding orders on a failed credit check By default, a credit check is performed for orders of the **SO** type, and the system displays a warning if the customer fails the credit check. However, if you want to instead hold sales orders on a failed credit check, you can select the **Credit check on entry** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window for the **SO** type. If the customer fails the credit check, the order gets the **Credit hold** status. Orders placed on credit hold can be released from credit hold if customer payments were entered or order amounts were appropriately decreased. To release these orders from credit hold, you can perform the **Release from credit hold** action in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. This initiates credit checks for each selected order, and gives the order the **Open** status if the credit check is successful.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About invoice order processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-invoice-order-processing-options section An invoice order, which has the IN order type selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, is a special type of sales order that you create when goods requested by a customer have been shipped or delivered already. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About invoice order processing options An invoice order, which has the IN order type selected in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, is a special type of sales order that you create when goods requested by a customer have been shipped or delivered already. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). An invoice order, which has the **IN** order type selected in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, is a special type of sales order that you create when goods requested by a customer have been shipped or delivered already. The processing of orders of this type does not involve shipments. ## Invoice order creation New orders of the **IN** type will be saved with the **On hold** status by default if the **Hold orders on entry** check box is selected for this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. The reference numbers for new orders are generated according to the number series assigned to this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. An invoice order is created by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For an invoice order, you specify the following information: + The order type **IN** + The customer, its location, and its VAT information (VAT zone and VAT registration ID) + A list of included stock and non-stock items with their quantities, units of measure, and unit prices + The credit terms + The payment method, if it is different from the default one For items that have lot or serial numbers tracked in Visma Net, you can specify these numbers, thus indicating that these particular items have been delivered to the customer. You should clear the **On hold** check box for the order to process its further. ## Approval of invoice orders If approval is required, when an invoice order is taken off hold, the system assigns an invoice order the **Pending approval** status and selects an approver for the order, in accordance with the approval map used for invoice orders. If the approver approves the order, the order gets the **Open** status. If the approver rejects the order, the order gets the **Rejected** status. If the order is then edited, the system changes the status to **Pending approval**. ## General workflow The processing of invoice orders involves using the following actions and generating the following documents. ![Images-SO_IN_Order_Flows](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_IN_Order_Flows.png) You can prepare a sales invoice for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the window toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, or you can create sales invoices by executing the **Prepare invoice** action for the multiple selected invoice sales orders in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. Inventory issues will be released automatically on release of invoices if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About cash sales processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-cash-sales-processing-options section You create an order with the CS order type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window when you sell items directly to the customer (with no shipping) and receive payment at that time. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About cash sales processing options You create an order with the CS order type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window when you sell items directly to the customer (with no shipping) and receive payment at that time. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). The processing of orders of this type does not involve shipments. ## Cash sales order creation New orders of the **CS** type will be saved with the **On hold** status by default if the **Hold documents on entry** check box is selected for this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. The reference numbers for new orders are generated according to the number series assigned to this order type in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window. An cash sale order is created by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For a cash sales order, you specify the following information: + The customer, its location, and its VAT information (VAT zone and VAT registration ID) + The included stock and non-stock items with their quantities, units of measure, and unit prices + The payment information, which includes the payment method (card information if payment is performed with a credit card), cash account, and payment reference number You cannot save a cash sales order before you specify the payment reference number. For items that have lot or serial numbers tracked in Visma Net, you can specify these numbers, thus indicating that these particular items have been delivered to the customer. You should clear the **On hold** check box for the order to process its further. ## General workflow The processing of cash sales orders (which may include stock items and non-stock items) involves using the following actions and generating the following documents. ![Images-SO_CS_Order_Flow](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_CS_Order_Flow.png) You can prepare a cash sales document in the Customer ledger workspace for a particular cash sales order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, or you can create the customer ledger cash sales documents by executing the **Prepare invoice** action for multiple selected cash sales orders in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. If the cash sales order includes only non-stock items, no inventory issue will be generated on release of customer ledger cash sales document. Inventory issues (if any) will be released automatically on release of customer ledger cash sales documents if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. A cash sales order gets the **Completed** status after both the customer ledger cash sales and inventory issue are released.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About suggested sales accounts /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-sales-accounts page In Visma Net, the automatically suggested sales account on a sales or customer invoice line and a sales order line can be retrieved from different fields and windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About suggested sales accounts In Visma Net, the automatically suggested sales account on a sales or customer invoice line and a sales order line can be retrieved from different fields and windows. This topic gives an overview of how a suggested sales account is set. ## Sales account on sales order The sales account suggested on the order line in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window is determined by the selected option for the **Use sales account from** field in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window, according to the following table.
Use sales account from Sales account
Reason code According to the sales account set in the Reason codes (CS211000) window for the reason code set on the sales order line.
Posting class

According to the option selected for Use sales account from in the Posting classes (IN206000) window. This can be:

  • Item
  • Warehouse
  • Posting class

See below.

Item,

Warehouse, or

Customer location

See below.
### Use sales account from Item, Warehouse, Customer location, and Posting class The table below gives an overview of how the sales account is set on the sales order line for **Item**, **Warehouse**, **Customer location** and **Posting class** (assuming **Posting class** is selected for **Use sales account from** in both the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) and [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window). The information applies when the line item has an item ID. #### Export type and General ledger account tab Note that the **Export type** value is first retrieved from the customer location, and if not set, from the customer class. If it is not set in the customer class either, the **Export type** is not set.
When Export type is Field in General ledger accounts tab
Domestic or not set, and line is taxable Sales account

Domestic or not set, and line is non-taxable,

or

Domestic exempt VAT

Sales - non-taxable account
EU Sales - EU account
Export Sales - export account
The window from which the **General ledger accounts** tab is read, corresponds to the **Use sales account from** option in the following way:
Use sales account from Window
Item

Stock items (IN202500), or

Non-stock items (IN202000)

Warehouse Warehouses (IN204000)
Customer location Customer locations (CR303010)
Posting class Posting classes (IN206000)
#### Exceptions no item ID The above information applies for a sales order line with no item ID, except when the sales account is to be retrieved from the item or posting class of the item. In these cases, the sales account is retrieved according to the **Customer location** option. ## Sales account on customer invoices, sales invoices and cash sales The sales account suggested on lines with an item ID in the [Sales invoices (AR301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-invoices-ar301000/) , [Cash sales (AR304000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) , and [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) windows is determined by the selected option for the **Use sales account from** field in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. This can be: + **Item** + **Posting class** ### Export type and General ledger account tab The table below gives an overview of how the sales account is set on the line for these options. Note that the **Export type** value is first retrieved from the customer location, and if not set, from the customer class. If it is not set in the customer class either, the **Export type** is not set.
When Export type is Field in General ledger accounts tab
Domestic or not set, and line is taxable Sales account

Domestic or not set, and line is non-taxable,

or

Domestic exempt VAT

Sales - non-taxable account
EU Sales - EU account
Export Sales - export account
The window from which the **General ledger accounts** tab is read, corresponds to the **Use sales account from** option in the following way:
Use sales account from Window

Item, or

Warehouse

Stock items (IN202500), or

Non-stock items (IN202000)

Posting class Posting classes (IN206000)
#### Exceptions no item ID For a line with no item ID, the sales account is retrieved according to the **Export type** table above and from the **General ledger accounts** tab in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. #### Invoice created from sales order If the sales invoice, customer invoice or cash sale is created from the sales order, the sales accounts on the lines are the same as in the sales order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

About suggested VAT categories /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-suggested-vat-categories page In Visma Net, the automatically suggested VAT category on lines in sales and customer invoices, sales orders, and cash sales, can be retrieved from different fields and windows. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About suggested VAT categories In Visma Net, the automatically suggested VAT category on lines in sales and customer invoices, sales orders, and cash sales, can be retrieved from different fields and windows. This topic gives an overview of how a suggested VAT category is set. The following table explains how the suggested VAT category on a sales order, sales invoice, customer invoice, and cash sale line is set.
IF you add a line THEN the suggested VAT category is
with an item ID

the VAT category of the item class belonging to the item, corresponding to:

  1. the customer location’s Export type, or if not set,
  2. the customer’s class’s Export type.

See the table below.

without an item ID the Default VAT category of the VAT zone set for the customer location.
## Export types and corresponding VAT categories Each **Export type** option for a customer location corresponds to one **VAT category** field in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window, according to the following table: |Export type|VAT category| |---|---| |**Domestic**|**Sales VAT category**| |**Domestic exempt VAT**|**Exempt VAT sales VAT category**| |**EU**|**Sales EU VAT category**| |**Export**|**Export VAT category**| ## Export type not set When you add a line with an item ID and the **Export type** is not set for the customer location and customer class, the suggested VAT category is retrieved from: 1. the **Sales VAT category** field in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window for the item class belonging to the item, or if this is not set, 1. the **VAT category** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) or [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window for the item ID. **Note**: in this case, make sure your **VAT report** is correct. ## Corresponding VAT category not set When the VAT category corresponding to the export type is not set, the item's standard VAT category ( **VAT category** field in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) or [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window) is suggested. ## Item's VAT category Note that if the VAT category is to be retrieved from the item, and the VAT category there does not have the **Sales** or **Both** VAT type in the [VAT categories (TX205500)](/visma-net-erp/help/vat/vat-windows/vat-categories-tx205500/) window, there will be an error on the line. |IF you add a line|THEN the suggested VAT category is| |---|---| |with an item ID|the item's **VAT category** in the [Non-stock items (IN202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/non-stock-items-in202000/) or [Stock items (IN202500)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/stock-items-in202500/) window| |without an item ID|the **Default VAT category** of the VAT zone set for the customer location.| ## Invoice created from sales order If a sales invoice, customer invoice or cash sale is created from the sales order, the VAT categories on the lines are the same as in the sales order.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About sales orders with allocations /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations section In Visma Net, you can reserve stock when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer can’t be shipped to another customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About sales orders with allocations In Visma Net, you can reserve stock when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer can’t be shipped to another customer. In Visma Net, you can reserve stock when you enter sales orders so that the items promised to a customer can’t be shipped to another customer. In cases when items are stocked at multiple warehouses, this helps your company avoid overstocks and stock outs because the system gives you the ability to reserve items at any warehouse and automates generating of transfers. This article describes the allocation options available for orders of the **SO** and**SA** predefined types. For descriptions of the order types, see: [About predefined types of sales orders.](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/) > [!NOTE] > Notice that in your system, the predefined order types can be modified. ## Quantities booked and allocated Fulfillment of sales orders is most effective if the system displays correct information about the quantities of items that are on hand and available for shipping. For orders of different types, the system reflects the quantities of items on the orders differently. (For more information, see: [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/).) The quantities of the items listed on sales orders of the **SO** type (regular sales orders) are generally shown in the system as the **SO prepared** quantities for orders with the **On hold**, **Credit hold**, **Pending approval**,and **Rejected** statues and as the **SO booked** quantities for orders with the **Open** status. You can view the availability information in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. The **SO booked**quantities are those shown on sales orders but not associated with particular orders. Booking imposes no actual restrictions on items. The booked quantities are shown for informational purposes only; these quantities of the items can be picked for any other orders and shipped. For sales orders of the **SA** type (sales orders), once a user saves a new sales order even with the **On hold** status, the system performs virtual **allocation** of the items for this order. That is, it actually reserves the requested quantities of the items. The quantities of the items that have been allocated for the order are added to**SO allocated** quantities and deducted from **Available for shipping** quantities (both of which are reflected in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window); thus, these quantities cannot be shipped for another order. If the ordered quantity is available only partially and cannot be fully allocated at the specified locations, the quantity that has been allocated for the order will be added to the **SO allocated** quantity, while the remaining (unallocated) quantity will be added to the **SO back ordered** quantity. Once you allocate this quantity in other warehouses, the quantity is moved to **SO allocated**. > [!NOTE] > Non-stock items are considered as always available and cannot be allocated. The sections below describe in greater detail how the stock allocations are performed and how the quantities of the allocated items are reflected in the system. ## Allocation schedules for SA orders When you save an order of the **SA** type in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the system automatically attempts to reserve the requested quantities of all line items in the specified warehouse. If you select any line of the order, you can then click**Allocations** in the toolbar of the **Document**details tab, and view whether the entire ordered quantity of the line item has been successfully reserved (allocated). For any of the line items, if the quantity in the specified warehouse is less than the requested quantity, the system reserves the available quantity for the order line and adds an additional allocation line for the remaining quantity. You can manually allocate the remaining quantity (or a part of it) in another warehouse or multiple warehouses. If you attempt to create a shipment before you allocate the entire quantities and if partial shipment is allowed by the specified line-level and order-level shipping rules, the system will be able to include only the allocated quantities into the shipment even if the ordered quantities are available for shipping at another location or locations but were not allocated for the order. > [!NOTE] > The **Allocations** button in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window is available if at least one of the following functionalities is enabled in your system: **Sales order to purchase order link**, **Multiple warehouse locations**, or **Lot and serial tracking**. To reserve the remaining quantity, you can choose one of the following scenarios: + You can specify another warehouse or multiple warehouses from which you can transfer the remaining quantity of the item. Select the **Allocated** check box for each additional line, specify the warehouse, and save the order. You can generate transfer orders for this sales order in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window, and record the receipt of the transferred quantities on a purchase receipt by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. After all the quantities of all line items are transferred to a single warehouse, you can create a shipment for the order. See the flowchart for this scenario below: ![Images-SAOrder_Flows](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SAOrder_Flows.png) For details on processing transfer orders, see: [About processing transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-processing-transfer-orders/). + You can purchase the remaining quantity if the item is out of stock at other warehouses too. Whether or not you can create partial shipments depends on the shipping rules specified for the orders lines and for the whole order. [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). You can specify that the remaining quantity should be purchased for the order by selecting the **Mark for** purchase order check box for the line on the **Details** tab. Once you take the sales order off hold, the order appears in the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window and you can generate a purchase order which will be linked to the original sales order. The quantity initially allocated for the order, remains allocated while the quantity that must be purchased remains unallocated. Once receipts for the remaining quantities are released, you can allocate the initially unallocated quantities manually by using the **Allocations dialog box** in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Even if the **Replan back-orders** check box is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window, releasing inventory receipts does not update automatically plan types for sales orders with allocations (on release of receipts, the unallocated quantities still are shown as **Back ordered** until you manually allocate them). For more information, see: ## Allocation schedules for sales orders If you have a sales order of the **SO** type, you may choose to allocate (reserve) the requested quantity for a specific item or multiple items if this is required by your company policies or was requested by the customer. If you perform allocation for any item on a sales order with the **On hold**, **Credit hold**, **Pending approval**, **Rejected**,or **Open** status, the item quantity will be added to the **SO**allocated quantity shown for the item in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window. Also, you may want to reserve the line item if the item is available but the quantity required for the order line is distributed between different warehouses and one or more transfers are required. > [!NOTE] > Transfer orders will be automatically generated only for the allocation schedules with the **Allocated** check box selected. ## Use of the allocations dialog box To allocate stock for a particular **SO** order, you use the**Allocations** dialog box, which opens once you click**Allocations** in the table toolbar of the **Document**details tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The**Allocations** dialog box can be invoked for each line of a sales order of the **SO** or **SA** type. By using this dialog box, for sales orders of the **SO** type, you can select whether to reserve the requested quantities in a single warehouse or multiple warehouses. For orders of the **SA** type, you can process the additional allocation lines generated by the system if the requested quantity cannot be shipped from the warehouse specified in the order. If the order line is marked for purchasing, the system automatically selects the **Mark for purchase order** check box for the line with the unallocated quantity in the **Allocations dialog box**. Also, you can use the **Allocations dialog box** to track the order fulfillment. For each allocation line, the **Related document** column contains the reference number of the document related to the current stage of the order fulfillment. > [!NOTE] > To view all the related documents, make sure the **Active** filter is not applied to the list of allocations. ## Availability calculation for orders with and without allocations The way the order quantity is reflected in the system depends on the settings selected for the item class in the [Item classes (IN201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/item-classes-in201000/) window. Generally, as the status of a sales order of the **SO** type changes, the order quantity updates the following total quantities: + The **SO prepared** quantity If the item's quantity is listed on an order with the **On Hold**, **Credit hold**, **Rejected**, or **Pending approval** status. + The **SO booked** quantity Once the order has been open with no quantities allocated. + The **SO allocated** quantity Once the shipment is created, the quantity that is included in the shipment. + The **On hand** quantity After the shipment has been confirmed and an invoice and inventory issue have been generated. The line item quantity on a sales order of the **SA** type updates the following quantities: + The **SO allocated** quantity Once a sales order of the **SA** type is created. + The **Back ordered** quantity The unallocated quantity that remains on the order. + The **SO allocated** quantity Once the received quantity (initially unallocated) is also allocated for the order. When a shipment is created, the quantity remains **SO allocated**. + The **On hand** quantity After the shipment has been confirmed and an invoice and an inventory issue have been generated.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About links between sales orders and purchase orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-links-between-sales-orders-and-purchase-orders page If your company sells items that are purchased only when sales orders for these items exist, each sales order may result in multiple purchase orders for different suppliers, and each purchase order may include items from multiple sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About links between sales orders and purchase orders If your company sells items that are purchased only when sales orders for these items exist, each sales order may result in multiple purchase orders for different suppliers, and each purchase order may include items from multiple sales orders. If your company sells items that are purchased only when sales orders for these items exist, each sales order may result in multiple purchase orders for different suppliers, and each purchase order may include items from multiple sales orders. These factors make it difficult to track the fulfillment of sales orders. In Visma Net, if the **Sales order to purchase order link** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, you can easily link sales orders to existing purchase orders and receipts, to enable the tracking of sales order fulfillment. The system uses these links to allocate the items listed on purchase receipts for specific sales orders and to automate the creation of transfer orders, if needed. This functionality can be very helpful if you have multiple warehouses and perform purchasing only to particular larger warehouses (distribution centres). The system will generate the required transfers between warehouses, and you can easily track where the particular sales order is in the fulfillment process. This topic describes the general ways of specifying links between sales orders and purchase orders, and between purchase receipts and sales orders. ## Linking sales orders to purchase orders If you need to promptly fulfill a sales order line for which the quantity of the item is insufficient, or if the sales order includes an item that is purchased only for specific sales orders, you can mark the applicable lines for purchasing; that is, select the check box in the **Mark for purchase order** column. Also, after you have shipped the available quantity of an item, you may need to order the remaining quantity that was unavailable at the time of shipping; in this case, you also can select the **Mark for purchase order** check box for the line. You can include a sales order line that requires purchasing in a purchase order in one of the following ways: + By using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window: Select the sales order line, and then click **Create purchase order** in the **Actions** menu in the toolbar. + By using the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window: Select multiple lines of different sales orders to create multiple purchase orders for these sales orders. The system consolidates the item quantities and group the items by supplier as needed. You also can link the line of a sales order that has the **Mark for purchase order** check box selected to an existing purchase order that has not been released yet. For example: If you have created a new order that lists the same items as the existing purchase order, you can link this sales order to the existing purchase order as follows: Open the sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, click **Purchase order link** in the table toolbar, and select the existing purchase order in the list. > [!NOTE] > If the purchase order has a quantity that exactly matches the total quantity on the sales orders that are already linked, you should first increase the quantity on the purchase order, and then link the sales order to this purchase order. ## Linking purchase receipts to sales orders Purchase orders are generated and emailed to suppliers. The items ordered in a sales order may be received to warehouses other than the warehouse specified on the sales order. If the users properly specify links between the purchase receipts and purchase orders, Visma Net enables tracking of sales order fulfillment, reserves the received items for sales orders, and automates transfers of the items, if needed. To make it possible to track items from receipts to original sales orders, you need to link each receipt to the corresponding purchase order in one of the following ways: + Open the purchase order in the [Purchase orders (PO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-orders-po301000/) window, and create a receipt for it by selecting **Enter purchase order receipt** from the **Actions** menu on the toolbar. + Create a receipt in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window, and link all the related purchase orders to this new receipt by clicking **Add purchase order** or **Add purchase order line** on the table toolbar. To view the original sales orders linked to the purchase receipt, for each receipt line, click **View demand** in the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. A dialog box opens that displays the list of sales orders that are linked to the purchase orders on which this receipt is based. After a receipt is properly linked to all the related purchase orders, you will be able to track the stage of fulfillment for each line of the original sales order by clicking **Allocations** in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. In the **Allocations** dialog box that opens, you can view an allocation that the system automatically performs to reserve the line item quantity required for the sale order on the purchase receipt. In the **Allocations** dialog box, you can also view the reference numbers of the related documents in the **Related documents** column: the purchase order and the receipt. (You can click any reference number of a related document to view the document.) On release of the receipt, the quantities of items required for the sales orders are deducted from the item quantities available for shipping. If items are received to a warehouse other than the warehouse specified on the sales order, the system will generate a transfer request, which you can use to create a transfer order by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window for a single transfer order, or in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window for multiple transfer orders. For details, see: [Create a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order/) and [Process multiple transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-multiple-transfer-orders/).

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Create a sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **SO** as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the sales order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the **Project** field, and select a particular project if this order is associated with the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Provide a brief description for this sales order. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab, check the ship-to information. 1. Notice in the **Sched. shipment** field the date when the shipment of this order is scheduled; by default, it is the **Requested on** date minus the lead days for this customer. Change the date if needed. 1. In the **Shipping rule** field, notice the default shipping rule used for this customer. Select another rule if needed. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar and start typing in the **Item ID** field. You can also search for an item by clicking ![search](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), the **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the **Sales after** check box if the item has been sold recently. The **Sales after** field appears with the date that is three months earlier than the current business date; select another date if needed. The list of items is populated with the items that have been sold in this period. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, notice whether the **Show available items only** check box is selected. With this check box selected, you may not see some of the items. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID, description, or alternative item ID, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list to items located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the line with the information about the item you want to add, and in the **Qty. selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data (which appears in the columns to the right) for the selected warehouse and make sure that the specified quantity is available in the selected warehouse. 1. Click the **Add and close** button at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Review the shipping rule for the line. Select another rule if it is needed for this item. 1. Review the date in the **Requested on** column. By default, it is the **Requested on** date specified for the order. Change the date if it is needed for this item and if it complies with the line shipping rule. 1. Review the date in the **Ship on** column. By default, it is the **Sched. shipment** date. Change the date if it is needed for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The line numbers are assigned automatically and cannot be changed. 1. If the **Lot or serial tracking** functionality is enabled in your system, and you want to specify particular lot or serial numbers for the items listed on the order, execute the following steps on the **Document details** tab: 1. Select a line with the item requiring lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** in the toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select one of lot or serial numbers available in the allocation warehouse. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 in case of the serialised item or to the lot quantity in case of a lot and the **Allocated** check box becomes selected. A new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another serial or lot number. Repeat this step until the remaining quantity is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a sales order with allocations /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-allocations section If some of the specific items require reservation (allocation) for the order, you can reserve them as described in the following instructions. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order with allocations If some of the specific items require reservation (allocation) for the order, you can reserve them as described in the following instructions. If some of the specific items require reservation (allocation) for the order, you can reserve them as described in the following instructions. For more information on processing options for sales orders of the **SO** type, see: [About sales orders with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-orders-with-allocations/). > [!NOTE] > The functionality of stock allocation (reservation) is available only if any of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: **Multiple warehouses**, **Sales order to purchase order link**, or **Lot and serial tracking**. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **SO** as the order type. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it in the window if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. If this order is associated with a particular project, in the **Project** field (where the non-project code appears by default), select the project. 1. Change the date of the sales order, which by default is the current date, if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number of the original customer document the sales order is based on. 1. Enter a brief description for this sales order. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab, check the ship-to information. 1. Notice in the **Sched. shipment** field the date when the shipment of this order is scheduled; by default, it is the **Requested on** date minus the lead days for this customer. Change the date if needed. 1. In the **Shipping rule** field, notice the default shipping rule used for this customer. Select another rule if needed. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar and start typing in the **Item ID** field. You can also search for an item by clicking ![search](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), the **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the **Item lookup** dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the **Sales after** check box if the item has been sold recently. The **Sales after** field appears with the date that is three months earlier than the current business date; select another date if needed. The list of items is populated with the items that have been sold in this period. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, notice whether the **Show available items only** check box is selected. With this check box selected, you may not see some of the items. 1. Optional: To narrow the resulting list to items located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list, select the line with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty. selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data for the selected warehouse, which appears in the columns to the right. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Review the shipping rule for the line. Select another rule if it is needed for this item. 1. Review the date in the **Requested on** column. By default, it is the **Requested on** date specified for the order. Change the date if it is needed for this item and if it complies with the line' shipping rule. 1. Review the date in the **Ship on** column. By default, it is the **Sched. shipment** date. Change the date if it is needed for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The line numbers are assigned automatically and cannot be changed. 1. If you need to reserve the quantities of specific items in the source warehouses for this sales order, perform the following steps for each item whose quantities should be reserved: 1. On the **Document details** tab, select the order line for the item. 1. Click the **Allocations** button in the toolbar. 1. In the **Allocations** dialog box, select the **Allocated** check box for the line. > [!NOTE] > If the full quantity is not available in the source warehouse, the system adjusts the quantity in the line (replaces it with the available quantity) and adds one more line for the remaining quantity. 1. For the additional line, select the check box in the **Allocated** column. Select the source warehouse from a list of warehouses, and review the quantity to be transferred from this warehouse; notice the item quantity available in this warehouse in the **Qty. on hand** column. The system may add one more line if the available quantity in the warehouse is less than the remaining quantity; if it does, either adjust the requested quantity or continue reserving item quantities in other warehouses. Click **OK** to save the allocation and close the dialog box. 1. If the **Lot and serial tracking** functionality is enabled in your system, and you want to specify particular lot or serial numbers for the items listed on the order, select a line with the item requiring lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** on the toolbar. If you haven't performed any allocation for this item, select the only line in the **Allocations** dialog box. If you already have performed allocations for this item, execute the steps below for each of the allocation lines. 1. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select one of lot or serial numbers available in the allocation warehouse. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 in case the item has serial numbers or to the lot quantity in case the item has lot numbers, and as a new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another serial or lot number. Repeat this step until the remaining quantity is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. In the top part of the window, clear the **Hold** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If your order requires any transfers, you will need to create and process transfer orders.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a sales order with reserved allocations /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-reserved-allocations section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order with reserved allocations > [!NOTE] > The functionality of stock allocation (reservation) is available only if any of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: **Multiple warehouses**, **Sales order to purchase order link**, or **Lot and serial tracking**. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **SA** as the order type. 1. In the **Customer** field, select the customer. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it on the form if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. If this order is associated with a particular project, in the **Project** field (where the non-project code appears by default), select the project. 1. Change the date of the sales order, which by default is the current date, if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Optional: In the **Customer order** field, enter the reference number of the original customer document the sales order is based on. 1. Enter a brief description for this sales order. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab, check the ship-to information. 1. Notice in the **Sched. shipment** field the date when the shipment of this order is scheduled; by default, it is the **Requested on** date minus the lead days for this customer. Change the date if needed. 1. In the **Shipping rule** field, notice the default shipping rule used for this customer. Select another rule if needed. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar and start typing in the **Item ID** field. You can also search for an item by clicking ![search](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg), the **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the dialog box, select the **Sales after** check box if the item has been sold recently. The **Sales after** box appears with the date that is three months earlier than the current business date; select another date if needed. The list of items is populated with the items that have been sold in this period. 1. Optional: In the **Item lookup** dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID, or description, or alternative item ID, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. Optional: To narrow the resulting list to items located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list, select the line with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty. selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data for the selected warehouse, which appears in the columns to the right. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Review the shipping rule for the line. Select another rule if it is needed for this item. 1. Review the date in the **Requested on** column. By default, it is the **Requested on** date specified for the order. Change the date if it is needed for this item and if it complies with the line' shipping rule. 1. Review the date in the **Ship on** column. By default, it is the **Sched. shipment** date. Change the date if it is needed for this item. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). > [!NOTE] > The line numbers are assigned automatically and cannot be changed. 1. To view how the quantities of the items for the order are allocated, complete the allocations, and view whether transfers will be needed, perform the following steps for each item: 1. On the **Document details** tab, select the order line for the item. 1. Click the **Allocations** button in the toolbar. This brings up the **Allocations** dialog box. 1. If there is only one line shown for the item in the dialog box, it has the **Allocated** check box selected, which means that the full quantity is reserved in a single warehouse; click **OK** to exit the dialog box and proceed to Step 13. > [!NOTE] > If there are more lines, that means that the available quantity at the specified warehouse is less the ordered quantity and you have to reserve the remaining quantity in another warehouse or in multiple warehouses. 1. In the additional line, select the **Allocated** check box. This enables the **Alloc. warehouse** column; click to bring up the **Select** dialog box. 1. In the **Select** dialog box, select the warehouse from a list of warehouses, and specify the quantity to be reserved in this warehouse. Notice the item quantity available in this warehouse in the **Qty. on hand** column. If the order line's full quantity has been allocated, click **OK** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. If still there is some quantity to allocate, repeat the two previous sub steps and click **OK** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. In the top part of the window, clear the **Hold** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). If the reserved quantity is split between multiple warehouses, appropriate allocations will be visible in the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window and you can generate transfer orders for the selected allocations or for all of them.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a sales order (new) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-new section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a sales order (new) > [!NOTE] > **This topic gives you information about how to create a sales order in the new [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. This task file is based on a window under construction, and new functionality will be added continuously.** > [!NOTE] > If you cannot find the functionality you need, you can click on the **Open in classic window** button to continue modifying the sales order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. The **SO** order type i selected by default. You can change it to one of the other supported order types. > [!NOTE] > currently, this window only supports order types **SO**, **CS**, **IN** and **QT**, and order types based on these order templates. 1. In the top part: 1. Select the customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date when the customer wants to receive the order. 1. Optional: in the **Customer order** field, you can enter the reference number of the original customer document that the sales order is based on. 1. Optional: in the **External reference** field, you can enter an external reference number for the sales order. 1. Check the **Ship via** code for the customer, and change it if needed. 1. Does the **Ship via** code have the **Manual** freight calculation method? + If yes, specify the **Freight cost** in the **Totals** tab. + If no, continue to step **i**. 1. Optional: provide a brief description for this sales order in the **Description** field. 1. Optional: you can add key information about the document in the **Notes** field. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the **Project** field, and select a particular project if this order is associated with the project. 1. On the **Delivery settings** tab: 1. Check the delivery contact and address and change the fields if needed. 1. Check the delivery information and change the fields if needed. > [!NOTE] > if the **Scheduled shipment** field is automatically set to a date earlier than the current business date, it will be updated automatically to today's business date after you save the order. 1. On the **Order lines** tab, for each item you want to add to the sales order, perform the following steps: 1. Start typing the item ID or item description in the **Find items** field, or click the search icon in the **Find items** field. In the items list that appears, click the line of the item you want to add. 1. Notice the **Available for shipping** column. The quantity shown as available for shipping is based on the default shipping warehouse set for the item. If the quantity available for shipping is zero, a warning icon ![Warning](/media/visma-net-erp/16_Warning.png) will be displayed. 1. In the **Quantity** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the UoM column) and press **Enter**. 1. If needed, enter or update the price for the order line in the **Unit price** column and press **Enter**. 1. If needed, change the status in the top part of the window. You can also change the status after saving. 1. Click ![Save](/media/visma-net-erp/Icon-24-save.png). Add notes to sales order printouts /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/add-notes-to-sales-order-printouts page When you create a sales order document in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can add notes on both header and line level. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add notes to sales order printouts When you create a sales order document in the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can add notes on both header and line level. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). Notes on header level can be added by clicking on **Notes** in the upper right corner and notes on line level can be added by clicking on the sign to the left on the document line. Follow the procedure below to add notes to the printouts. ## How to get notes displayed on printouts 1. On the sales order document, select the check box **Print note on external sales documents**. If you also would like to print the notes on internal documents, select the check box **Print note on internal sales documents**. 1. Click **Reports** and choose **Print sales order/quote** and you will see that the notes, both on header and line level, are displayed. The default selection on the **Print note on external sales documents** and **Print note on internal sales documents** options are set in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window on the **General settings** tab. Create a shipment /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-shipment page You can create a shipment in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window for sales orders with the Open status and when there are order lines available for shipping. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a shipment You can create a shipment in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window for sales orders with the Open status and when there are order lines available for shipping. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). 1. Click the **Create shipment** button in the bottom right corner. 1. Does your order contain different warehouses? + If yes, in the pop-up window, select which warehouse you want to create the shipment for, and click **Confirm**. + If no, go to step 3. 1. Wait for the shipment to be created. **Result** for a successfully created shipment: + shipment is added in the **Shipments** tab. There, you can click the shipment number to open the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. + order status changes to **Shipping**.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create multiple shipments for one order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create multiple shipments for one order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Select **Customer**, **Location**, **Warehouse ID**, **Operation** and **Shipment date**. 1. In the **Document details** tab, click **Add order**. 1. Select **Order type** and **Order no.**. The order lines from the selected order will be displayed in the table. > [!NOTE] > Order lines that have been shipped completely or that are already in a shipment that has the status **Open**, will not appear in this table. 1. Select the lines you want to include in the shipment. Click **Add** or **Add and close**. This will save the shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat Step 2 to 5 to create a new shipment for different order lines. 1. Repeat this procedure for all shipments you want to create for the same order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Change customer or customer location on sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-order section In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales order, even when it already has lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change customer or customer location on sales order In Visma Net, you can change the customer or customer location on a sales order, even when it already has lines. If you want to change the customer or customer location to one with a different VAT calculation, on a sales order with lines, consider the following to make sure the VAT calculation is changed as well. ## Before you start Make sure the **Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document** check box in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) window is selected. See also: [Recalculate VAT when customer is changed on document](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/vat/set-up-calculation/recalculate-vat-when-customer-is-changed-on-document/). 1. Do you want to change the customer location? + If **Yes**, make sure that the **Export type** is filled in for the location in the [Customer locations (CR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-locations-cr303010/) window. + If **No**, continue to step 2. 1. In the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window on the order, click ![icon-select](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-select.jpg) in the **Customer** or **Location** field and select a new customer or location. **Result**: the **VAT details** tab and the VAT category on the lines will be updated accordingly if the new customer or location has a different VAT calculation.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Change the order status /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-the-order-status section In the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can change the order's status manually by changing the status directly in the status field. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Change the order status In the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can change the order's status manually by changing the status directly in the status field. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). In this topic you will learn how you change the order status manually in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window, and from and to which order statuses you can change. ## How to change the order status Follow the steps below to change the status of an order. 1. Make sure your order is saved. 1. Click the current status of the order. **Result**: the possible statuses that you can change to are displayed in the drop-down list (see also the table in the section below). 1. Select the status you want to change to. 1. Click ![save-icon-new](/media/visma-net-erp/save-icon-new.png). ## Possible statuses to change to The following table displays per order status to which statuses you can change manually.
When the status is You can change the status to
Hold Open, Cancelled
Open Back order, Cancelled, Hold
Back order Cancelled, Hold, Open
Credit hold Cancelled, Hold, Open
Cancelled Open

Shipping

Invoiced

Completed

not applicable
Hide and rearrange columns /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/hide-and-rearrange-columns section For each table in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can select which columns to display or hide. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Hide and rearrange columns For each table in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window, you can select which columns to display or hide. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). You can also rearrange the order of the displayed columns. Follow the steps below to adjust a table to your needs. 1. In the top right of the table, click ![Table settings](/media/visma-net-erp/table-settings-icon.png "Table settings icon"). **Result**: the **Column setup** panel opens. 1. Select the check boxes for the columns you want to display, and deselect the check boxes for the columns you want to hide. 1. Click and hold the column bar to drag a column to a different place in the column order. 1. Optional: to reset the visible columns and column order to the default settings, click **Reset to default**. 1. Click ![close icon](/media/visma-net-erp/close-icon-new.png) in the top right of the panel when you are done making your changes. Update a column for all order lines /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines page For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Update a column for all order lines For an order with existing lines, you can change some values on all order lines at once. You can do this in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window for the **Salesperson**, **Warehouse**, **Shipping rule**, **Requested on** and **Ship on** columns. This is particularly useful when your order has many lines. Follow the steps below to update one of the above mentioned columns for all existing order lines. 1. Open the order in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. Change the field that corresponds to the column you want to update for all order lines. The table below lists the field names and their corresponding columns in the **Order lines** tab. 1. Answer the question as follows: + Click **Yes** if you want to update all existing order lines with the newly selected value. + Click **No** if you only want newly added order lines to retrieve the newly selected value. > [!NOTE] > you cannot select the lines you want to update, the change will be applied to all existing lines. Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/mark-line-for-purchasing-and-create-purchase-order section You can mark a sales order line for purchasing in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window and create the linked purchase order. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order You can mark a sales order line for purchasing in the Sales orders (SO30100S) window and create the linked purchase order. For more information: [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/). Follow the steps below: 1. On the **Order lines** tab: 1. In the **Purchase order link** column, select one of the following options: + **Purchase to order**, + **Drop-shipment**. 1. In the **Supplier** column, select the supplier which will supply the line item. 1. In the **Supplier price** column, edit the automatically set price if necessary. > [!NOTE] > You can only edit the price if the **Override supplier price** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, the **General information** tab. 1. Make sure the order status is set to **Open** and click ![save-icon-new](/media/visma-net-erp/save-icon-new.png). 1. Click the **Actions** button and click **Create purchase order**. **Result**: the [Create purchase orders (PO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/create-purchase-orders-po505000/) window opens where you can create the purchase order. > [!NOTE] > To remove the mark for purchasing on a line in the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window, select **-** in the **Purchase order source** column.

Related pages

Tasks

Print, email or export an order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/print-email-or-export-an-order section Follow the steps below to print an order, email it, or export it to Excel or PDF. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print, email or export an order Follow the steps below to print an order, email it, or export it to Excel or PDF. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window. 1. Create and save a new order, or select a specific order number. 1. In the window footer, click **Preview document**. **Result**: + for order types SO, CS and IN, the document opens in the [Order confirmation (SO64111S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-so64111s/) report, + for order type QT, the document opens in the [Quote (SO64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/quote-so64101s/) report. 1. From the table below, choose you next action based on what you want to do with the order:
IF you want to THEN
print the order click icon-print
email the order click Send and continue in the Send (CR306015) window
download the order in Excel or PDF format
1. click **Export**
    1. select **Excel** or **PDF**
Process transfer orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders section Transfer orders can be created manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another, or generated automatically when the stock for sales order fulfillment is reserved in remote warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process transfer orders Transfer orders can be created manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another, or generated automatically when the stock for sales order fulfillment is reserved in remote warehouses. Transfer orders can also be generated in the process of replenishment, to move goods from the source warehouse to the warehouse where they are needed for sale. > [!NOTE] > This order type is available only if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. These topics describe transfer order processing options available in Visma Net. About processing transfer orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-processing-transfer-orders section You can create transfer orders manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About processing transfer orders You can create transfer orders manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another. You can create transfer orders manually to account for goods that are moved from one warehouse to another. Also, you can generate transfer orders for sales orders when you reserve (allocate) the stock for sales orders in other warehouses. In the process of replenishment, transfer orders are created to move goods from the source warehouse to the warehouse where they are needed for sale. ## Creation of transfer orders You can create a transfer order (an order of the **TR** type) by entering all the required information in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. If needed, you can reserve stock in the source warehouse for each line item on the transfer order by selecting the line and clicking the **Allocations** button in the table toolbar, and then creating additional allocation schedules. Also, you can create multiple transfer orders by using the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window. In this window, the system displays the transfer requests (also referred to as **plan types**) that have been automatically generated by the system in the following cases: + For each sales order (of the **SO** or **SA** type) for which the stock has been allocated in other warehouses. + For replenishment by transfer if the items are to be purchased and delivered to a source warehouse. In the [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) window, you can select the transfer requests (plan types) by source and destination warehouses, item class, and product work group. After reviewing the resulting list, you can generate transfer orders for each line in the list, or you can select the orders to be generated by selecting the check boxes to the left of the plan types. You can view the generated orders in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## Transfer workflow The processing of transfer orders involves performing the following actions and generating the following documents. ![Images-SO_Transfer_Flow](/media/visma-net-erp/Images-SO_Transfer_Flow.png) ## Fulfillment of transfer orders A transfer order is fulfilled by one shipment or by multiple shipments. You can create a shipment for a transfer order from the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, by clicking **Actions** - **Create shipment**. If you need to create shipments for multiple transfer orders, you can run the **Create shipment** process by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/)window. The shipments will be grouped by source and destination warehouses and by stock items. The item quantities on the shipment are deducted from the **Available** and **Available for shipping** quantities and added to the **SO allocated** quantity; you can see these quantities in the [Inventory allocation details](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-allocation-details-in402000/) window, as well as in other windows. You can print a pick list for each shipment by clicking **Actions** - **Print pick list**in the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Alternatively, you can print pick lists for multiple shipments by applying the **Print pick lists** action for the selected shipments in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. You can confirm each shipment by using the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Upon shipment confirmation, the quantities of items on the shipment are added to the **SO shipped** quantity. To promptly update the item quantities in the destination warehouse, you can click **Actions** - **Update inventory** on the toolbar, and the item quantity is deducted from **SO shipped** and added to **In transit**. (These quantities are displayed on a variety of inventory inquiries and reports.) You use the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/)window to create a transfer receipt (that is, a receipt of the **Transfer receipt** type) to record the receipt of the transferred items at the destination warehouse. You create a transfer receipt by adding the lines from one transfer order or multiple transfer orders. A transfer receipt may include only some of the lines from a transfer order; you can also change the quantity in a particular line if the items specified in this line were received partially. On release of the transfer receipt, the item quantity is deducted from the **In transit** quantity and added to **Quantity available** and **Quantity on hand**. (These quantities are displayed on a variety of Inventory inquiries and reports.) Thus, the quantity of the item that has been transferred from the source warehouse to the destination warehouse becomes available for sale. ## Landed costs on transfer orders If your company's warehouses are located in different regions and your company uses external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses, then the transportation expenses must be added to the item costs as landed costs. For information on landed costs, see: [About landed costs for transfers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-landed-costs-for-transfers/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

About landed costs for transfers /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-landed-costs-for-transfers page If your company's warehouses are located in different regions, your company may need to use external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About landed costs for transfers If your company's warehouses are located in different regions, your company may need to use external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses. If your company's warehouses are located in different regions, your company may need to use external transportation services to transfer stock items between warehouses. In this case, the transportation expenses must then be added to the item costs as landed costs. ## Typical scenarios of landed cost application As with landed costs for purchase receipts, the landed costs for transfers can be added to transfer receipts or, alternatively, to supplier ledger invoices that are linked to specific transfer receipts. The following methods of applying the landed costs are available: From PO : The landed costs are added to a transfer receipt (described below in the **Scenario I** section). From AP : The landed costs are added to a invoice created in the name of a landed cost supplier—the company that actually moved the goods from one warehouse to another warehouse (described below in the **Scenario II** section). From both : The landed costs can be added either way; that is, both scenarios can be used. ## Scenario I: Adding landed costs to a transfer receipt For a description of the general stages in transfer processing and a flowchart showing these stages, see: [About processing transfer orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/about-processing-transfer-orders/). A transfer is performed as described briefly below. ### Processing a transfer order A new transfer order of the **TR** order type is created in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. The transfer order lists the stock items to be moved with the following details: item ID, quantity, and destination and source warehouses. For more details, see: [Create a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order/). After creation of the transfer order, the related shipment is created and confirmed; on shipment confirmation, the system generates an inventory transfer and releases it if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. On release of this inventory transfer, the following general ledger transactions are created for each stock item: + Inventory account: Cr, cost of goods sold (COGS) amount + In-transit account: Dr, COGS amount The inventory account for each item is determined by the posting class of this item; the rule for its selection is specified in the **Use inventory/accrual account from** field in the [Posting classes (IN206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/posting-classes-in206000/) window. If the **Subaccounts** functionality is enabled in your system, the inventory subaccount used for the batch is defined by the rule specified in the **Combine inventory/accrual sub. from** field in the same window. The in-transit account (and subaccount, if applicable) are specified in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. As the result of the posting of this batch, the **On hand qty.** of the items in the source warehouse is decreased. ### Processing a transfer receipt You create a receipt (of the **Transfer receipt** type) for the transfer order by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On the **Landed costs** tab, you can add any landed costs by specifying a landed cost code for each transportation service provider involved in the transfer, as well as the amount, currency, and VAT category. On release of this transfer receipt, the system generates the following documents: + **Inventory receipt** The document is automatically released if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. On release of this inventory receipt, the item's on-hand quantity in the destination warehouse is increased. The following general ledger transactions are created: The costs the transferred items will have in the destination warehouse depend on the valuation methods assigned to the items. For items with the **FIFO** valuation method, this receipt creates a new cost layer with the number and date of this receipt (not the original receipt that is selected by **FIFO** method from receipts in the source warehouse). For details, see the **An example of cost updating for a FIFO Item** section below. + In-transit account: Cr, COGS amount + Inventory account: Dr, COGS amount + **Inventory adjustment** This document specifies the landed cost amounts to update the costs of each item. For details, see the **Cost updating** section below. + **Accounts payable invoice** This document is created based on the invoice received from the landed cost supplier and includes the following general ledger transactions: + Landed cost accrual account: Dr, landed cost amount + Supplier ledger account: Cr, landed cost amount The landed cost accrual account is associated with the landed cost code. The supplier ledger account is associated with the location of the supplier that provided the transportation services (the landed cost supplier). ## Scenario II: Creating an invoice for landed costs In this scenario, the landed costs are added to an invoice created in the name of a landed cost supplier, which is the company that actually moved the goods from one warehouse to another warehouse. The new transfer order of the **TR** order type is created in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, and processed as described above in the **Transfer order processing** subsection. ### Processing a transfer receipt You create a receipt (of the **Transfer receipt** type) for the transfer order by using the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. On release of this transfer receipt, the system generates an inventory receipt. On release of this inventory receipt, the following general ledger transactions are created: + In-transit account: Cr, COGS amount + Inventory account: Dr, COGS amount As a result, the **On hand qty.** of the items in the destination warehouse is increased by the quantities of the received items. The costs the transferred items will have in the destination warehouse depend on the valuation methods assigned to the items. For items with the **FIFO** valuation method, the system creates a new cost layer with the number and date of this receipt (not the original receipt that is selected by the **FIFO** method from receipts in the source warehouse). For details, see **An example of cost updating for a FIFO Item** section below. ### Creating an invoice for the landed costs You create an invoice for the landed costs by using the [Purchase invoices (AP301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/supplier-ledger/supplier-ledger-windows/purchase-invoices-ap301000/) window. For the invoice, you can select the supplier that performed the transfer of the goods, and on the **Landed costs** tab, you add multiple transfer receipts and split the landed cost amount among the stock items selected from these receipts. On release of the invoice with the landed costs, the following transactions are generated: + Landed cost accrual account: Dr, landed cost amount + Accounts payable account: Cr, landed cost amount Release of the invoice does not affect the item's on hand quantity in the source warehouse or in the destination warehouse. Also, the system automatically generates an inventory adjustment and splits the landed cost amount among the specified items according to the allocation method of this landed cost type and the valuation method of each item. ### Cost updating Upon release, an inventory adjustment updates the inventory costs of items differently depending on the valuation method of the item as follows: + For items with the **Standard cost** valuation method, the landed cost amount is moved from the landed cost accrual account to the standard cost variance account. The following transactions are generated: + Standard cost accrual account: Cr, landed cost amount + COGS account: Dr, landed cost amount + For items with the **Average** cost valuation method, the landed cost amount moved from the Landed cost accrual account to the inventory account (determined by the posting class of the item) updates the average cost of the unit. The following transactions are generated: + Landed cost accrual account: Cr, landed cost amount + Inventory account: Dr, landed cost amount + For stock items with the **FIFO** or **specific** valuation method, the system creates a new cost layer based on the transfer receipt (this layer has the date and the quantity from the transfer receipt) and the amounts moved between accounts vary as follows, based on the quantity of the layer: + If the layer still has the original quantity, the cost of all items in the layer is updated, and the landed cost amount from the landed cost accrual account is transferred to the inventory account assigned to the item. + If the current quantity in the layer is less than the original quantity on the receipt, the landed cost amount is moved from the landed cost accrual account to update the COGS account and the inventory account in proportion to the sold and unsold quantities, respectively.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create a transfer order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order section If you need to record the movement of goods from one warehouse to another, create a transfer order (a sales order of the predefined TR type). 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create a transfer order If you need to record the movement of goods from one warehouse to another, create a transfer order (a sales order of the predefined TR type). > [!NOTE] > Transfer orders are available only if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **TR** as the order type. 1. In the **Destination warehouse** field, select the warehouse to be replenished. 1. Change the date of the transfer if you don't want to use the current date. 1. If this transfer is associated with a particular project, in the **Project** field (where the non-project code appears by default), select the project. 1. Enter a brief description for this transfer. 1. On the **Document details** tab, for each item you want to add to the transfer order, perform the following steps: 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the table toolbar. The **Inventory lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. Optional: In the **Inventory lookup** dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Inventory** field. 1. Optional: To further narrow the resulting list to a particular sub item of the item (if sub items are used in your system), select it in the **Sub item** field. 1. Optional: To further narrow the resulting list to an item located in a particular warehouse, select the warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the resulting list, select the line with the item you want to add, and in the **Quantity** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the **UoM** column). Notice the item availability data in the columns to the right. 1. Click **Add and close** at the bottom of the dialog box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. If you need to reserve the quantities of specific items in the source warehouse specifically for this transfer, perform the following steps for each item for which you want to reserve the stock: 1. On the **Document details** tab, select the order line for the item. 1. Click the **Allocations** button on the toolbar. 1. In the **Allocations** dialog box that is opened, select the check box in the **Allocated** column for the line. Click **OK** to save the changes and close the dialog box. 1. Click **Save**. 1. If the **Lot or serial tracking** functionality is enabled in your system, and you want to specify particular lot or serial numbers for the items listed on the order, execute the following steps on the **Document details** tab: 1. Select a line with the item requiring lot or serial numbers, click **Allocations** in the toolbar. The **Allocations** dialog box opens. 1. In the **Lot/serial no.** column, select one of lot or serial numbers available in the allocation warehouse. Notice as the line quantity changes to 1 if the item has serial numbers or to the lot quantity if the item has lot numbers, and as a new line for the remaining quantity is added. In the new line, select another serial or lot number. Repeat this step until the remaining quantity is zero. 1. Click **OK** to save the allocations and close the dialog box. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process a transfer order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-a-transfer-order section Users fulfill transfer orders by creating shipments in the source warehouse that are received later at the destination warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process a transfer order Users fulfill transfer orders by creating shipments in the source warehouse that are received later at the destination warehouse. If you need to process one transfer order or a few transfer orders, you can do this by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. > [!NOTE] > You can also process multiple transfer orders by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. If you need to process a multi-line transfer order that involves multiple warehouses (and hence generates multiple shipments), you should also use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. ## Create a shipment for the transfer order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **TR** as the order type. 1. Select the reference number of the transfer that you want to process. 1. In the **Actions** menu (in the toolbar), select **Create shipment**. 1. In the **Specify shipment parameters** dialog box, which appears, change the date of the shipment and the source warehouse if needed. Click **OK** to close the dialog box. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, which opens, review the shipment information and the packages if automatic packaging is configured in your system. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Process the shipment for the transfer order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **TR** as the order type. 1. Select the needed transfer order by its reference number. 1. In the **Shipments** tab, click the reference number, which is a link to the shipment. 1. In the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, which opens, click **Actions** - **Print pick list**. Prepare the items for packaging and shipping according to the pick list. 1. Open the **Packages** tab, and review the shipment information and the packages if automatic packaging is configured in your system, or specify the packages manually. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click **Save** in the toolbar. 1. Click **Actions** - **Confirm shipment** on the toolbar. Once the operation is successfully completed, the status of the shipment is changed to **Confirmed**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Update inventory** in the toolbar. A new inventory two-step transfer is generated and released if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Inventory preferences (IN101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-preferences-in101000/) window. ## Create a receipt for the transfer order 1. Go to the [Purchase receipts (PO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/purchases/purchases-windows/purchase-receipts-po302000/) window. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) in the toolbar. 1. Select **Transfer receipt** as the receipt type. 1. Select the destination warehouse in the **Warehouse** field. 1. In the toolbar of the **Document details** tab, click **Add transfer**. In the **Add transfer order** dialog box, which opens, select the source warehouse in the **From warehouse** field. 1. Select the check box next to the transfer order for which the items were received. 1. Click **Add and close** in the dialog box. 1. Review the added lines in the **Document details** tab, and correct the quantity for the lines for which the items are partially received. 1. Make sure the **Hold** check box is cleared. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process multiple transfer orders /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-multiple-transfer-orders page Transfer orders are fulfilled by the creation of shipments that are later received at the destination warehouse. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process multiple transfer orders Transfer orders are fulfilled by the creation of shipments that are later received at the destination warehouse. Transfer orders are fulfilled by the creation of shipments that are later received at the destination warehouse. If you need to process a single transfer order, see: [Process a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-a-transfer-order/). You can create shipments, print pick lists and shipment confirmations for multiple transfer orders simultaneously in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. Then you will need to confirm each shipment and then create receipts one by one. 1. Go to the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Create shipment**. 1. Optional: Select the appropriate option in the **Select by** field to specify how orders are displayed: + **Ship date**: To display the orders by their shipment dates + **Order date**: To display the orders by their creation dates 1. Optional: In the **Start date** and **End date** fields, specify the date range for the dates of the type you selected. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list of orders, select a particular customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Optional: In the **Ship via** field, select a particular ship via code. 1. Optional: Specify and apply a filter to select orders by specific criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can create a reusable filter for the window that, once created, gives you the ability to display particular documents each time you bring up this window. For more information, see: [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/). 1. Review the resulting list of orders and select the orders of the **TR** type for processing by selecting the check boxes next to them (in the column with a check box as a heading). 1. Click **Process** in the toolbar. Success of the process is indicated by a green **OK** button that appears in the toolbar.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments section Shipping goods is the main part of the order fulfillment process. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process shipments Shipping goods is the main part of the order fulfillment process. Shipping goods is the main part of the order fulfillment process. This part includes an overview of the shipment processing in Visma Net. About shipment processing options /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/about-shipment-processing-options page Shipments, which are a key part of the order fulfillment process, can be incoming or outgoing. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About shipment processing options Shipments, which are a key part of the order fulfillment process, can be incoming or outgoing. Shipments, which are a key part of the order fulfillment process, can be incoming or outgoing. Outgoing shipments (based on the **issue** operation) involve goods shipped to customers, while incoming shipments (based on the **receipt** operation) involve customer returns based on return orders. This topic discusses outgoing shipments (we will refer to them as shipments). For details on incoming shipments, see: [About predefined order types for customer returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns/). ## Creating shipments In Visma Net, you can directly create a shipment document for a particular sales order in the following ways: + In the classic [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, by selecting **Actions** - **Create shipment** in the window toolbar, + In the new [Sales orders (SO30100S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s/) window, by clicking **Create shipment** in the window footer. The [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window can be used to create a consolidated shipment for multiple sales orders of the same customer. To create multiple shipments for multiple sales orders of multiple customers, use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. In order to optimise the picking process for multiple employees and offer separate deliveries over time, you can create multiple shipments for one sales order and one warehouse by using the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. See also: [Create multiple shipments for one sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order/). The system automatically assigns reference numbers to the created shipment documents, in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to shipments in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. ## Shipments with zero lines Your organisation may prefer to send customer invoices that list all the items from their sales orders so that they can see which items were ordered but at the time were unavailable. To allow the system to add these zero lines to shipments, select the **Add zero lines for items not in stock** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. Selecting this option also can be helpful if you do not want to rely completely on availability data, because in some cases, although the system shows an item as not in stock, the quantities required for a shipment may be available for some reason. You should select this check box if you have item classes for items of which negative quantities are allowed and if shipments are created manually on a per-order basis; then users can edit the shipments and specify the quantities that are currently not reflected on the books correctly and may be available on shipment confirmation (for instance if shown as quantities on purchase receipts). For example, if for a purchase order line with the **Back orders allowed** shipping rule, the available quantity of the item is zero, the shipment will not include this line if the **Add zero lines for items which are not in stock** option is not selected; while if it is selected, the shipment will include a zero-line for this item, and you will be able to enter the quantity that is actually available for this order line. If the **Add zero lines for items which are not in stock** option is selected, you should decide whether to allow the creation of shipments with all zero-quantity lines. You can allow the creation of such shipments by selecting the **Create zero shipments** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. However, we do not recommend using this option if in your organisation, shipments are generally created automatically by using the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. ## Shipping rules and partial shipments When you create a shipment for a sales order (by using either the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) or the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window), the system checks the availability of the items included in the sales order and uses the shipping rules to determine whether the shipment can be created. If the shipment is created, the system changes the order status to **Shipping**. When you create a shipment by using the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, if the system detects that no shipment can be created according to the shipment rules (due to a shortage of items), the system displays a warning; you then decide how to process the order further. However, if you use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window to create a shipment (or multiple shipments) and the system detects that no shipment can be created for an order according to the shipment rules, the system changes the status of the order to **Back order**. This system behaviour allows you to set up automatic processing of sales orders in the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window to be performed on a schedule. For more information on shipping rules, over-shipment, and under-shipment, see: [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). For sales orders with the predefined type **SO**, partial shipments are generally allowed if the **Shipping rule** field in the **Delivery settings** tab in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window has the **Back orders allowed** option selected and the **Back orders allowed** shipping rule is selected for at least one order line. These settings let you ship the available quantity of goods in one shipment and the remainder in one shipment or multiple shipments as the goods are received. ## Partial shipments and free items If a sales order is fulfilled with multiple partial shipments, the **Free item shipping** setting, located on the **General information** tab of the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window, controls how free items should be shipped: proportionally to the amounts of goods in the partial shipments ( **Proportional** ), or sent with the last shipment ( **On last shipment** ). If free items are sent with the last shipment and only part of the needed quantity of free items is available, only the available quantity is shipped, and no back order is initiated for the missing free items. If the quantity of the free items should be distributed between the partial shipments, the total quantity of free items on all partial shipments for the order may be less than the quantity initially calculated for the applicable group discount, because the system rounds the free item quantity down on each partial shipment. In such a case, you can add the missing quantity of the free item manually to any of the partial shipments. ## Consolidated shipments You can consolidate shipments, creating one shipment document for multiple sales orders of the same customer, unless the **Ship separately** check box in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window is selected for the order type being used. As long as the check box is cleared, you can use the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window to create one shipment for multiple sales orders associated with the same customer. Sales orders with the predefined order type **SO** don't require goods to be shipped separately for separate sales orders. The **Use customer's account** setting in a shipment document is copied from the sales order. Thus, if you mass-process multiple sales orders that have different states of the **Use customer's account** check box on the **Delivery settings** tab of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, the system will group the sales orders by the state of this check box and create two consolidated shipments: The first shipment will include the sales orders in which the check box is selected, and the second shipment will include the sales orders in which this check box is cleared. ## Pick lists With Visma Net, you can print a pick list for a particular shipment with the **On hold** or **Open** status by clicking **Action** - **Print pick list** in the window toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. If you need to print pick lists for multiple shipments, you can select the **Print pick list** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window and process all the shipments on the list or only the selected shipments. If a pick list was once printed for a shipment, the shipment will be listed in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window for this processing only if the **Show printed** check box is selected, which helps avoid double packing for the same shipment. The pick list is prepared based on item availability information and the pick priorities of warehouse locations. If the highest priority location has insufficient stock of any of the requested items, the system will search for another location with some quantity available for shipping to fill the remainder. On a pick list, items are ordered based on location, pick priority, and expiration dates of items. ## Automatic packaging suggestions If you use a set of standard boxes for shipping goods, you can configure the system to suggest boxes for each sales order based on the packaging options and weights specified for stock items. For details on configuring this functionality, see: [About automatic packaging for non-integrated carriers](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-automatic-packaging-for-non-integrated-carriers/). If this functionality is configured, you will be able to view the suggested minimal set of boxes for a shipment on the **Packages** tab of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. If needed, you can manually correct information about packages to match the quantities and weights of the actual packages. If the shipment is sent under a ship via code, the information about packages can be used by the system to calculate the freight amount. ## Shipment confirmation After all the required goods are picked and packed, you can confirm the shipment by clicking **Actions** - **Confirm shipment** in the window toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. (If you need to print a shipment confirmation document before the shipment is confirmed, you can use the [Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-confirmation-so642000-so64200s/) report.) This action updates the available quantities and changes the status of the associated sales order. During shipment confirmation the system checks that for all items for which lot or serial numbers are tracked, the appropriate numbers were specified. Whether the order status is changed to **Completed** or **Back order** depends on the availability of the ordered items and on the shipping rules specified for the order lines and the whole order. For more information, see: [About shipping rules](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-shipping-rules/). If you need to correct a shipment that has been confirmed, click **Actions** - **Correct shipment** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to open the shipment and make the required corrections. The associated order's status is changed to **Shipping** once you open the shipment. You can confirm the shipment after you have edited it. If an order that has a confirmed shipment has been was cancelled, you can reopen the order by clicking **Actions** - **Re-open order** in the toolbar of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. You can then delete or correct the shipment by using the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. ## Variations of the shipment processing To complete the confirmed shipments, you must generate sales invoices and inventory issues and release them. For generating and processing invoices and issues you can select one of the following workflows: Workflow I: : First generate sales invoices, then release them. On release of these invoices, inventory issues are generated automatically. Workflow II: : First create issues, and then generate invoices. Release invoices and issues. Both workflows are described in more detail in the subsections below. ## Workflow I This workflow is used by most organisations. You can prepare an invoice for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, or you can create invoices for multiple selected shipments by executing the **Prepare invoice** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. Edited invoices will be put on credit hold if the **Hold invoices on failed credit check** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. Inventory issues which are created automatically when you release the invoices and will be released automatically if the **Automatically release inventory documents** check box is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window. If this check box is cleared, you have to release inventory issues. ## Workflow II If due to shipment policies, your organisation processes customer invoices later than it does inventory issues, you can first create issues and then generate invoices. You can create an inventory issue for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Update inventory** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, or you can create inventory issues for multiple selected shipments by executing the **Update inventory** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. You can prepare an invoice for a particular order by clicking **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** in the toolbar of the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, or you can create invoices for multiple selected shipments by executing the **Prepare invoice** action in the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. To adjust the dates in the invoices generated for confirmed shipments, you can use the **Use shipment date for invoice date** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window as follows: + Select this check box to set the shipment date as the invoice date + Clear the check box to use the current business date as the default date for the invoice If there is a significant time interval between the release of issues and the release of invoices in your organisation, you may need to delay posting the costs to the COGS accounts. To do this, select the **Use shipped-not-invoiced account** check box in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/)window, and then select the appropriate **Shipped-not-invoiced account** field and **Shipped-not-invoiced sub account** to be used to temporarily record the costs. After that, on release of issues, the costs of shipped items will be temporarily recorded to this shipped-not-invoiced account (with the specified subaccount); then later, on release of invoices, the costs will be moved from the shipped-not-invoiced account to the appropriate COGS /expense accounts.

Related pages

Tasks

Windows

Print pick lists for multiple shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/print-pick-lists-for-multiple-shipments section Print lists for shipments can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print pick lists for multiple shipments Print lists for shipments can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. For more information: [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/). Print lists for shipments can be printed on per shipment basis from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Alternative, you can print multiple pick lists for multiple shipments by using the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. Go to the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Print pick list**. 1. Optional: In the **Start date** and **End date** fields, specify the date range for the dates of the type you selected. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list of orders, select a particular customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Optional: In the **Ship via** field, select a particular ship via code. 1. Optional: In the **Warehouse** field, select the source warehouse for shipments. 1. Optional: Specify and apply a filter to select orders by specific criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can create a reusable filter for the window that, once created, gives you the ability to display particular documents each time you bring up this field. For more information, see: [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/). 1. Select the shipments for processing by selecting the check boxes next to them (in the column with a check box as a heading). 1. Click **Process**. The ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed if the processing is successful.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print shipment confirmations for multiple shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/print-shipment-confirmations-for-multiple-shipments section Shipment confirmations can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print shipment confirmations for multiple shipments Shipment confirmations can be printed on per shipment basis from the Shipments (SO302000) window. For more information: [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/). Shipment confirmations can be printed on per shipment basis from the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. Alternative, you can print multiple shipment confirmations for multiple shipments by using the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. Go to the [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) window. 1. In the **Action** field, select **Print shipment confirmation**. 1. Optional: In the **Start date** and **End date** fields, specify the date range for the dates of the type you selected. 1. Optional: To further narrow the list of orders, select a particular customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Optional: In the **Ship via** field, select a particular ship via code. 1. Optional: In the **Warehouse** field, select the source warehouse for shipments. 1. Optional: Specify and apply a filter to select orders by specific criteria. > [!NOTE] > You can create a reusable filter for the window that, once created, gives you the ability to display particular documents each time you bring up this window. For more information, see: [Filters (CS209010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customisation/customisation-windows/filters-cs209010/). 1. Select the shipments for processing by selecting the check boxes next to them (in the column with a check box as a heading). 1. Click **Process**. The ![icon-confirmation](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-confirmation.png) is displayed if the processing is successful.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process a back order for a sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/process-a-back-order-for-a-sales-order page When you register a sales order on an item that can not be completely shipped because of the insufficient quantity of the item, it is possible to create a back order for that item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process a back order for a sales order When you register a sales order on an item that can not be completely shipped because of the insufficient quantity of the item, it is possible to create a back order for that item. To be able to create a back order for the item, the option **Back orders allowed** has to be selected in the **Shipping rule** column on the sales order line. ## Processing a back order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Create a shipment for the sales order for the quantity that can be completed. Select **Actions - Place on back order**. The sales order status changes to **Back order**. 1. Create and receive the purchase order that makes it possible to complete the sales order. 1. Go to the [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) window. You can now create a shipment for the back-ordered item on the sales order. Create multiple shipments for one order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create multiple shipments for one order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Select **Customer**, **Location**, **Warehouse ID**, **Operation** and **Shipment date**. 1. In the **Document details** tab, click **Add order**. 1. Select **Order type** and **Order no.**. The order lines from the selected order will be displayed in the table. > [!NOTE] > Order lines that have been shipped completely or that are already in a shipment that has the status **Open**, will not appear in this table. 1. Select the lines you want to include in the shipment. Click **Add** or **Add and close**. This will save the shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat Step 2 to 5 to create a new shipment for different order lines. 1. Repeat this procedure for all shipments you want to create for the same order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Add shipment lines that are not in a sales order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/add-shipment-lines-that-are-not-in-a-sales-order section To be able to add a shipment line that is not in a sales order, the shipment should already have at least one line from a sales order. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Add shipment lines that are not in a sales order To be able to add a shipment line that is not in a sales order, the shipment should already have at least one line from a sales order. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, create a shipment with a sales order line or open an existing shipment with at least one line from a sales order. You can only add lines to shipments that have the **Open** status. 1. Click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png). 1. Fill in the mandatory fields **Item ID**, **Warehouse**, **UoM** and **Shipped qty.**, and if needed, fill in other fields. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). **Result**: the line is added to the shipment and to the sales order from the first shipment line. > [!NOTE] > if you delete an added shipment line, you will be asked if you want to delete the corresponding line in the sales order as well.

Related pages

Concepts

Cancel shipments /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/cancel-shipments page To enable the option to cancel shipments, 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Cancel shipments To enable the option to cancel shipments, ## Prerequisite to cancel shipments 1. Go to window [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/), section **Shipment settings.** 1. Check the box **Update the warehouse automatically when shipment is confirmed** 1. Check the box **Enable shipment cancellation**. Result: You have enabled the option to cancel shipments. ## Cancel a shipment 1. Go to window [Shipments (SO302000).](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) 1. Select the shipment you want to cancel. Ensure **Status** is **Confirmed** 1. Click the button **Action** at the top of the window. 1. Select **Cancel shipment**. Result: Your shipment transaction is cancelled. ## Confirm the cancellation 1. Stay in window [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/). 1. Go to tab **Orders**, column **Inventory correction ref.no.** ### Results + A new **Inventory correction ref.no.** for the issue is created. + The cancellation issue is displayed in the window [Issues (IN302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/issues-in302000/) with **Trans. type** equals **Return**. + Cancelling a shipment has the same effect on the FIFO calculations as creating a receipt. This means the item(s) will be placed as the last bought item(s) and with the same value as they had when creating the shipment. + In the cancellation issue, under the tab **Financial details**, you will find the link to window [Journal transactions (GL301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/journal-transactions-gl301000/). By cancelling a shipment, a record for the reverse of the cost of goods sold is created in the **General ledger**. + You can see the shipment in the window [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/), tab **Shipments**, now with **Status** equals **Cancelled**. Process returns /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns section Visma Net gives you the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process returns Visma Net gives you the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns. Visma Net gives you the flexibility to manage various types of customer returns. Depending on your company's return policies, you can use some of the predefined return types or create new custom order types for returns. This part of the help provides information on processing customer returns. About predefined order types for customer returns /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns page The predefined order types in Visma Net support a variety of returns, both those that involve advance authorisation and those that do not. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # About predefined order types for customer returns The predefined order types in Visma Net support a variety of returns, both those that involve advance authorisation and those that do not. Authorised returns, also known as **return merchandise authorisation (RMA) orders**, involve the company providing a numbered authorisation to permit a customer return. The order types for authorized returns are based on the **RMA order** automation behaviour, see: [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/). Visma Net provides the following predefined order types for authorised returns: + Return with replacement (the **RR** order type) The customer returns goods for an exact replacement (if, for instance, the goods were defective). + Return for credit (the **RC** order type) The customer returns goods for credit in the amount of the returned goods only. + Generic authorised return (the **RM** order type) The customer returns goods for possible credit and replacement. Here, different goods than those returned may be included for replacement, and freight and shipping and handling charges may be included. You can use credit notes (of the **CM** order type) to account for unauthorised returns. The following sections describe the processing of returns for each of the predefined order types. ## Credit note (CM) A document with the **CM** order type is used to account for unauthorised returns from customers; this order includes a reference to the original invoice. For each line of the order, you should specify a reason code, warehouse, and location. When this document is released, the system generates an issue of the **Credit note** type in the Inventory workspace (which updates the availability data) and a credit note in Customer ledger. ## Return for credit (RC) You use a document of this type to authorise customer returns for credit in the amount of the returned goods only. By customer request, an order (of the **RC** type) is created and its printed or electronic copy is sent to the customer to accompany the goods the customer intends to return. If the items to be returned have specific lot or serial numbers, you can select these particular items from the list of issued items, transfer them from the original invoice (by adding this invoice), or type them manually. Once the goods have been returned, the received goods are returned to inventory, and the customer receives money back. For the **RC** sales order, you create a shipment of the **Receipt** type by using the **Create receipt** action on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once the shipment has been confirmed, you generate a credit note in the Customer ledger and Inventory workspaces by clicking **Prepare invoice** on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. For detailed instructions on processing return orders of the **RC** type, see: [Process returns for credit (RC)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-for-credit-rc/). ## Return with replacement (RR) You create an order with the **RR** type for authorisation of a customer return with an exact replacement. Once you create an order with this type, its printed or electronic copy is sent to the customer. The customer then returns the rejected goods according to this order, the goods are returned to inventory, and the customer receives a replacement for the rejected goods. When you create an order of the **RR** type, you fill in the lines for the items to be returned (or select the appropriate invoices) and select **Receipt** as the transaction type for these lines. If the items to be returned have specific lot or serial numbers, you can select these particular items from the list of issued items, transfer them from the original invoice (by adding this invoice), or type them manually. An order of the **RR** type for each line with the **Receipt** transaction type should have a line with **Issue** as the transaction type for a replacement item. You can add an **Issue** type line ((or multiple lines of this type)multiple lines of this type) manually. Alternatively, as long as the item in each **Receipt**-type line is not tracked by serial or lot numbers, you can select the **Auto-create issue** check box for the line. Then (on saving) the system will add the corresponding **Issue** type lines automatically by copying the details from the **Receipt**-type lines. The processing of an order of the **RR** type includes the following stages: Receiving the returned items : You create shipment of the **Receipt** type by using the **Create receipt** action on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once the shipment has been confirmed, you click **Update inventory** on the **Actions** menu in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window to generate an appropriate inventory transaction and to update the item availability data. Shipping the replacement items : In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, for this **RR** order, you create a shipment with the **Issue** operation, confirm it, and update the data in the Inventory workspace (by clicking **Update inventory** in the toolbar, as described in the previous stage). No documents in the Customer ledger workspace are generated for an RR order. For detailed instructions on processing return orders of the **RR** type, see: [Process returns with replacement (RR)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-with-replacement-rr/). ## Generic authorised return (RM) **RM** is the basic order type used for authorised returns. You use a document of this type for authorisation of customer returns. By customer request, the order is created and a printed or electronic copy is sent to the customer to accompany the goods to be returned. Once the goods are received by your organisation, they are returned to inventory, and the customer receives other goods instead. Any shipping charges on returns and on replacements can be reflected. When creating an order of the **RM** type, you fill in the lines for the items to be returned (by typing the details manually or by selecting the appropriate invoices) and select **Receipt** as the transaction type for these lines. For each line with the **Receipt** transaction type, an order of the **RM** type should have a line with the **Issue** transaction type for a replacement item. You can add an **Issue** type line (or multiple lines of this type) manually. Alternatively, as long as the item in each **Receipt** type line is not tracked by serial or lot numbers, you can select the **Auto-create issue** check box for the line. Then the system will add the corresponding **Issue** type lines automatically by copying the details from the **Receipt** type lines. The processing of an order of the **RM** type includes the following stages: Receiving the returned items : You create a new order of the **RM** type for the items to be returned, and then you create a shipment of the **Receipt** type by using the **Create receipt** action on the **Actions** menu of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Once the shipment has been confirmed, you generate a credit note in the Customer ledger and Inventory workspaces by clicking **Prepare invoice** on the **Actions** menu in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. Shipping the replacement items : For the **Issue** -type lines of the **RM** order, you create a shipment, confirm it, and prepare an invoice. For detailed instructions on processing return orders of the **RM** type, see: [Process authorised returns (RM)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-authorised-returns-rm/).

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process returns for credit (RC) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-for-credit-rc page To credit a customer for returned goods, you create an authorised return for credit order (that is, an order of the RC order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process returns for credit (RC) To credit a customer for returned goods, you create an authorised return for credit order (that is, an order of the RC order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). ## Create a return for credit (RC) order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select RC as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the Customer field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the Project field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the Requested on field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. Provide a brief description of this return order. 1. On the Document details tab, add all the invoices that list the items that have been returned for credit. For each invoice, click on the toolbar and perform the following steps: 1. In the Reference no. field of the Add invoice details dialog box, which opens, select the customer invoice by its identifier. 1. Once the selected document appears in the table, select the check box to the left of each line with an item to be returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the Show non-stock kits by components check box. 1. Click the Add and close button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of each added line, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click Save. 1. Optional: To add other items that will be returned, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click in the table toolbar. The Inventory lookup dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the Inventory field. 1. To further narrow the list to a particular subitem of the item (if subitems are used in your system), select it in the Subitem field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the Quantity column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the UoM column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which adds the items and closes the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of the added table row, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click. 1. Clear the Hold check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click. ## Process the return for credit You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( RC ) and its reference number. 1. Click Actions - Create receipt to create a shipment (with the Receipt operation) that accounts for the returned goods. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. In the opened window, review the shipment details, clear the Hold check box, and click. 1. Click Actions - Confirm shipment. 1. Click Actions - Prepare invoice. This generates a credit note with the returned items listed. The system opens the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window to display the new document. 1. Optional: In the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window, release the credit note by clicking Actions - Release. This creates an issue transaction of the Credit note type in the Inventory workspace. Once you release the credit note, the original **RC** order gets the **Completed** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process cash returns (CR) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-cash-returns-cr page To process a return of items that were sold on a cash sale, you create a cash return order (that is, an order of the CR order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process cash returns (CR) To process a return of items that were sold on a cash sale, you create a cash return order (that is, an order of the CR order type) by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). ## Create a cash return (CR) order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select CR as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the Customer field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the Project field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the Requested on field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. In the Description field, provide a brief description of this return order. 1. To specify the items to be returned, you can either add items or add original documents. To add the items to be returned, go to Step 12. If the items to be returned were listed on cash sales documents, on the Document details tab, add the original cash sales document. To do this, click in the table toolbar and perform the following steps for each cash sales document: 1. In the Type field of the Add invoice details dialog box, which opens, select Cash sales. 1. In the Reference no. box, select the customer document by its identifier. 1. Once the selected document appears in the table, select the check box to the left of each line with an item to be returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the Show non-stock kits by components check box. 1. Click the Add and close button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. Specify the Reason code for the return in each added line on the Document details tab. 1. Click. 1. To add the items that will be returned and that were paid by one payment, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click in the table toolbar. The Inventory lookup dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the Inventory field. 1. To further narrow the list to a particular subitem of the item (if subitems are used in your system), select it in the Subitem field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the Quantity column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the default unit of measure shown in the UoM column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which closes the dialog box. 1. In the row with the item you added, specify the Reason code for the return. 1. Click. 1. In the Payment ref. field on the Payments tab, type the payment reference number. 1. Clear the Hold check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click. ## Process the cash return You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( CR ) and its reference number. 1. Click Actions - Prepare invoice. This generates a cash return document with the returned items listed. The system opens the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window to display the new document. 1. Optional: In the opened window, select Actions - Release to release the cash return document. This updates the availability data (an inventory transaction of the Credit note type) and generates a cash transaction of the Cash return type. You can view the cash return document in the [Cash sales - reference information](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/cash-sales-ar304000/) (AR304000) window. Once you release the cash return, the original **CR** order gets the **Completed** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process returns with replacement (RR) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-with-replacement-rr section To authorise a return with replacement of the same item or a similar item (or multiple such items) when no additional charges are involved, you create an order of the RR type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process returns with replacement (RR) To authorise a return with replacement of the same item or a similar item (or multiple such items) when no additional charges are involved, you create an order of the RR type by using the Sales orders (SO301000) window. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). When you create an order of the **RR** type, make sure that for each line with the **Receipt** transaction type, the order has a line with **Issue** as the transaction type for a replacement item. You can add such lines manually (at this point, you can select other items for replacement), or you can select the **Create issue automatically** check box for each **Receipt** type line (for items that are not tracked by serial or lot numbers) to make the system add the lines of the **Issue** type automatically. ## Create a return with replacement (RR) Order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select **RR** as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the **Customer** field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the **Project** field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the **Requested on** field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. Provide a brief description of this return order. 1. On the **Document details** tab, add all the invoices that list the items to be returned. For each invoice, click **Add sales invoice** in the table toolbar and perform the following steps: 1. In the **Add invoice details** dialog box that opens, select the customer invoice in the **Ref. no.** field. 1. Once the selected document appears in the table in the dialog box, select the check box to the left of each line with an item being returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the **Show non-stock kits by components** check box. 1. Click the **Add and close** button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. In the **Operation** column for each the added line, make sure that **Receipt** is selected. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). 1. Optional: To add other items that will be returned, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click **Add item**. The **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the unit of measure shown in the **Sales unit** column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which closes the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of the added table row, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click. 1. For each line with an item that will be replaced with other units (or another unit) of the same item, make sure the **Create issue automatically** check box is selected. > [!NOTE] > For items that are tracked by lot or serial numbers, always select the **Create issue automatically** check box. 1. For the lines that do not have the **Create issue automatically** check box selected, add the lines (with the **Issue** operation) for the replacement items by following the above steps 11a - 11 d, and make sure that Issue is selected in the Operation column of the added table lines. 1. Clear the **Hold** check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png). ## Process the return with replacement You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( RR ) and its reference number. 1. Click Actions - Create receipt to create a shipment (with the Receipt operation) that accounts for the returned goods. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. In the opened window, review the shipment details, clear the Hold check box, and click. 1. Select Actions - Confirm shipment. 1. Select Actions - Update inventory. This generates an inventory issue (of the Return type) with the returned items listed. You process the order for the replacement items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by specifying its type ( RR ) and its reference number. > [!NOTE] > Notice that the order lines with the **Receipt** operation (for returned items) have been automatically marked as completed. 1. Select **Actions** - **Create shipment** to create a shipment (with the **Issue** operation) that accounts for the replacement items. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. To print a pick list for the selected replacement items, select Reports - Print pick list. 1. Once you have prepared the shipment, click Actions - Confirm shipment. 1. Select Update inventory. This action updates the availability data and changes the status of the original RR order (created in the window) to Completed. Notice that no documents are created in the Supplier ledger workspace.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Process authorised returns (RM) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-authorised-returns-rm page In the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can create a generic authorised return or an order document of the RM order type when a customer wants to replace any returned item with an item with a higher price, or when shipping and handling fees are charged for returns. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process authorised returns (RM) In the Sales orders (SO301000) window, you can create a generic authorised return or an order document of the RM order type when a customer wants to replace any returned item with an item with a higher price, or when shipping and handling fees are charged for returns. For more information: [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/). When you create an order of the **RM** type, make sure that for each line with the **Receipt** transaction type, the order has a line with **Issue** as the transaction type for a replacement item. You can add such lines manually (at this point, you can select other items for replacement), or you can select the **Create issue automatically** check box for each **Receipt** type line (for items that are not tracked by serial or lot numbers) to make the system add the lines of the **Issue** type automatically. ## Create an authorised return (RM) order 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select RM as the order type. 1. Select the customer in the Customer field. 1. Check the location of the customer on the order, and change it if needed. 1. Check the currency and the currency exchange rate on the customer document, and change these on the order if needed. 1. Notice the non-project code that is shown in the Project field; if this order is associated with a particular project, select the project. 1. Check the date of the order, and change it if needed. 1. In the Requested on field, specify the date of the customer document. 1. In the Description field, provide a brief description of this return order. 1. On the **Document details** tab, add all the invoices that list the items to be returned. For each invoice, click **Add sales invoice** in the table toolbar and perform the following steps: 1. In the **Add invoice details** dialog box that opens, select the customer invoice in the **Ref. no.** field. 1. Once the lines of the selected invoice appears in the table, select the check boxes to the left of each line with an item that is being returned. > [!NOTE] > To view and add particular stock items of non-stock kits, select the **Show non-stock kits by components** check box. 1. Click the **Add and close** button to add selected lines to the order and close the dialog box. 1. For each added line, in the **Operation** column, make sure that **Receipt** is selected in the **Operation** field. 1. Notice the warning indicated by a red circle at the **Order total** element. Point to the mark to read the warning: **Document balance will go negative. Document will not be released.** > [!NOTE] > Until you add a replacement line (of the **Issue** type) or multiple such lines to make the order balance positive, you can save the document only in the **On hold** status. 1. Select the **Hold** check box 1. Optional: To add other items that will be returned, perform the following steps for each item: 1. Click **Add item**. The **Item lookup** dialog box appears with a list of active stock items. 1. In the dialog box, to find the item by a string in its item ID or description, type this string in the **Item** field. 1. In the resulting list of items, select the row with the item you want to add, and in the **Qty selected** column, specify the requested quantity of the item (measured in the unit of measure shown in the **Sales unit** column). 1. Click the Add and close button, which closes the dialog box. 1. In the Operation column of the added table row, make sure that Receipt is selected. 1. Click. 1. For the lines that do not have the **Create issue automatically** check box selected, add the lines (with the **Issue** operation) for the replacement items by following the above steps 11a - 11 d, and make sure that Receipt is selected in the Operation column of the added table lines. 1. Add a line (with the Issue operation) for a refund as follows: 1. In the **Item ID** field, select the refund non-stock item. 1. Optional: In the Quantity column, specify the quantity of the item. 1. In the **Manual amount** column, type the refund amount. 1. Click. 1. Clear the Hold check box in the top part of the window. 1. Click. ## Process the authorised return You process the order for the returned items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by its type ( **RM** ) and its reference number. 1. Click **Actions** - **Create receipt** to create a shipment (with the **Receipt** operation) that accounts for the returned goods. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, review the shipment details, clear the **Hold** check box, and click **Save**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Confirm shipment**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Prepare invoice**. This generates a credit note with the returned items listed. The system opens the [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) window to display the new document. 1. Optional: In the opened window, release the credit note by clicking **Actions** - **Release**. This creates an issue transaction of the **Credit note** type in the Inventory workspace. You process the order for the replacement items as follows: 1. Go to the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. 1. Select the order by its type ( **RM** ) and its reference number. > [!NOTE] > Notice that the lines with the **Receipt** operation (for returned items) have been automatically marked as completed. 1. Click **Actions** - **Create shipment** to create a shipment (with the **Issue** operation) that accounts for the replacement items. The system opens the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window to display the new shipment. 1. Optional: To print a pick list for the selected replacement items, click **Actions** - **Print pick list** in the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Once you have prepared the shipment, click **Actions** - **Confirm shipment**. 1. Click **Actions** - **Prepare invoice** to generate an Customer ledger invoice with the **Balanced** status. This gives the original **RM** order the **Invoiced** status. The Customer ledger invoice can be further processed in the Customer invoices window in the Inventory workspace. Once you release the invoice, the original **RM** order gets the **Completed** status.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Create multiple shipments for one order /visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create multiple shipments for one order 1. Go to the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window. 1. Select **Customer**, **Location**, **Warehouse ID**, **Operation** and **Shipment date**. 1. In the **Document details** tab, click **Add order**. 1. Select **Order type** and **Order no.**. The order lines from the selected order will be displayed in the table. > [!NOTE] > Order lines that have been shipped completely or that are already in a shipment that has the status **Open**, will not appear in this table. 1. Select the lines you want to include in the shipment. Click **Add** or **Add and close**. This will save the shipment. 1. In the [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) window, click ![icon-add](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-add.png) and repeat Step 2 to 5 to create a new shipment for different order lines. 1. Repeat this procedure for all shipments you want to create for the same order.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Sales windows /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales windows Sales windows - overview /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-windows-overview page On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales windows - overview On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. On the menu of Visma Net, the windows are grouped into workspace items on the left hand side of the screen. Each item contains a workspace with tiles and categories. This topic follows the listing of the category items in the Sales workspace. ## Transactions [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) [Customer invoices (SO303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000/) [Shipments (SO302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000/) [Customer payments (AR302000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payments-ar302000/) ## Registers [Customers (AR303000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customers-ar303000/) [Sales prices (AR202000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-prices-ar202000/) [Customer payment methods (AR303010)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-payment-methods-ar303010/) [Discounts (AR209500)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/discounts-ar209500/) ## Processes [Process orders (SO501000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000/) [Process shipments (SO503000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000/) [Reprint invoices (SO50501S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/reprint-invoices-so50501s/) [Print/email orders (SO502000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000/) [Create transfer orders (SO509000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000/) (available for the **Multiple warehouses** functionality) [Process sales invoices (SO505000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000/) ## Inquiries [Customer details (AR402000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/customer-details-ar402000/) [Sales order list (SO40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-list-so40101s/) [Sales order history by item (SO40102S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-history-by-item-so40102s/) [Sales order list (SO40101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-list-so40101s/) [Sales profitability analysis (AR409000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/sales-profitability-analysis-ar409000/) [Sales shipment history by item (SO40103S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-shipment-history-by-item-so40103s/) ## Reports [Sales order summary (SO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-summary-so610500/) Provides summary information on sales orders, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. [Sales order details by customer (SO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-customer-so611000/) Displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. The data can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Sales order details by stock item (SO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-item-so611500/) Shows information on open sales orders, ordered by item. [Order register (SO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/order-register-so612000/) Displays the list of sales orders recorded in Visma Net during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and order type. [Shipment summary (SO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-summary-so620500/) Gives you information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Shipment details by customer (SO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-customer-so621000/) Shows information on shipments, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Shipment details by stock item (SO621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-item-so621500/) Displays shipment information, ordered by item. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. [Shipment register (SO612500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-register-so612500/) Displays the list of shipments during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and carrier. [Daily sales profitability (AR676000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/daily-sales-profitability-ar676000/) Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated on the specific transactions to each customer during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by salesperson and customer (AR673000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-salesperson-and-customer-ar673000/) Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for the sales performed by particular salespersons during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by customer class and customer (AR675000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-class-and-customer-ar675000/) Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of all sales to each customer class and each customer during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by customer and order (AR672000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-customer-and-order-ar672000/) Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages of the sales to each customer during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by item and order (AR671000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-and-order-ar671000/) Displays the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages for the items that were listed on the sales orders created in Visma Net during the specified date range. [Sales profitability by item class and item (AR674000)](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-reports/sales-profitability-by-item-class-and-item-ar674000/) Shows the net sales amounts, costs, margins, and margin percentages calculated for each item and item class based on the sales that occurred during the specified date range. ## Preferences [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) Create transfer orders (SO509000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/create-transfer-orders-so509000 page This window is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Create transfer orders (SO509000) This window is only available if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. For more information: [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/). This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This window is only available if the **Multiple warehouses** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. You use this window to create transfer orders, which replenish the stock at the destination warehouse by transferring the required quantities of items from the source warehouse. You can create transfer orders for replenishment requests generated by using the [Prepare replenishment (IN508000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/prepare-replenishment-in508000/) window. Also, you create transfer orders for sales orders with allocations if for order fulfillment it is required to move stock from one warehouse to another. For details, see: [About automated replenishment](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/manage-replenishment/about-automated-replenishment/). ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the selected transfer and replenishment requests (plan types) or those for which you have selected the Included check box, and generates transfer orders for them.
Process all Processes all the listed transfer and replenishment requests and generates transfer orders for them.
Inventory summary Click this to view details about the items in the stock.
## The top part In this area, you can select the creation date and filter the requests by item class, warehouse, stock item, product manager, or product work group.
Element Description
Creation date The date to be used for creating transfer orders.
Product manager

A field and the Me check box, which you use as follows to select the product manager to whom the items are assigned for maintenance:

  • Select the Me check box to view the items assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another product manager to view the items assigned to the manager.
  • Leave the elements blank to view items assigned to all product managers of the selected product work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the product work group the items are assigned to for maintenance:

  • Select the My check box to view the items assigned to your product work group or to the selected product manager in the group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another product work group in the field to display the items assigned to the work group or to a particular product manager in the selected group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the items assigned to all product work groups.
Item class ID The item class of the stock items to be transferred. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Item ID The stock item to be transferred. Leave the field blank to display requests for multiple items.
Weight The total weight of the item quantities to be transferred.
Volume The total volume of the item quantities to be transferred.
From warehouse The warehouse from which the items are to be transferred.
To warehouse The warehouse to which the items are to be transferred.
Customer The customer specified on the sales orders for which the transfers are requested; the field is blank for transfers initiated for replenishment.
Order type The type of the sales order for which the transfer is requested; the field is blank for transfers initiated for replenishment.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order for which the transfer is requested; the field is blank for transfers initiated for replenishment.
## The table This table holds the replenishment requests that match the selection criteria you have specified. You can process all listed items or only those you select.
Column Description
Plan type The type of functional built-in plan (an internal request based on allocation or a replenishment request) that shows the quantity of the item for which transfer is required.
Item ID The item ID of the stock item for which the transfer request or replenishment request was generated.
Item description The description provided for the stock item.
From warehouse The warehouse to supply items for the transfer.
To warehouse The destination warehouse for the transfer.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the stock item being transferred.
Quantity The quantity of the item requested for the transfer.
Requested on The date when the request was generated.
Customer The ID of the customer that requested the item on the sales order (if applicable).
Customer name The name of the customer that requested the item or items on the sales order (if applicable).
Order no. The reference number of the sales order for which this transfer has been initiated (if applicable).
Weight The total weight of the item quantity to be transferred.
Volume The total volume of the item quantity to be transferred.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Customer invoices (SO303000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/customer-invoices-so303000 section In this window, you can create customer ledger documents, such as invoices, credit notes, debit notes, cash sale, and cash return documents. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Customer invoices (SO303000) In this window, you can create customer ledger documents, such as invoices, credit notes, debit notes, cash sale, and cash return documents. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can create customer ledger documents, such as invoices, credit notes, debit notes, cash sale, and cash return documents. You can also use this window to view existing documents, including those that have been generated automatically in the process of fulfilling sales orders or those that account for the return of goods. For additional details about invoices in the Inventory workspace, see: [About invoices in the sales module](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-invoices-in-the-sales-workspace/). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Change customer location on customer invoice](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/change-customer-location-on-customer-invoice/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions:

  • Release Changes the status of the document to Open.
  • Release from credit hold Releases the document from credit hold and gives you the ability to save it with the Balanced status.
  • Email invoice Generates an email for the invoice in accordance with the INVOICE mailing settings of the customer.
  • Recalculate prices Opens the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.
  • Write-off Navigates to the Write-off balances and credits (AR505000) window so that you can write off the document balance.
  • Reclassify general ledger batch
  • Send to AutoInvoice Sends the invoice automatically to AutoInvoice
  • Poll invoice status: Updates the AutoInvoice status and Business level status under the AutoInvoice section of the Invoice address tab.

+

Generate e-Invoice XML draft:

Generates a draft version of the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 XML, so that you have the possibility to check the content and validate that all settings are correct, before you start using the PEPPOL BIS 3.0 format for electronic invoicing. It is also possible to use this action after you have sent the invoice to AutoInvoice.

The action can be used on all statuses except On hold , and becomes available if PEPPOL BIS 3.0 is activated and you have enabled the setting Send to AutoInvoice on the Invoice address tab.

Note

** The generated file is a draft and may not be used as a legal document.

Reports

Provides fast access to the following reports:

  • Unreleased transactions
  • Print invoice
  • Preview invoice
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options used for updating prices and discounts for the invoice.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. You can select one of the following options:

All lines
To refresh prices and discounts for all lines
Current line
To refresh prices and discounts for the selected line
Set current unit prices A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the item prices with the current prices.
Override manual prices A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must update the prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit price column) with the current prices. The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected. After the manual prices are overridden in the document, the system clears the Manual price check boxes in the appropriate document lines.
Recalculate discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system must recalculate the discounts for the current line or for the selected lines.
Override manual line discounts A check box that indicates (if selected) that the system should cancel the manual discounts for the current line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field) and search for applicable automatic discounts.
OK Closes the dialog box and applies the selected options.
## The top part You use this part to view summary information for an existing invoice or to provide this information for a new invoice.
Element Description
Type

The type of document, which can be one of the following options:

Invoice
A document used to invoice a customer for the shipped goods
Debit note
A document used to charge a customer for the shipped goods if undercharging or an error was detected
Credit note
A document used to credit the customer for returned goods
Cash sale
A document used for cash sales that do not update the customer’s customer ledger
Cash return
A document used for returns on cash sales; it does not update the customer’s customer ledger
Invoice no. The reference number of the document, which is automatically generated by the system in accordance with the number series assigned to invoices and notes in the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically and can be one of the following options: On hold, Open, or Closed.
Hold A check box, which is unavailable for documents that are generated automatically, that indicates (if selected) that the document has a status of On Hold and cannot be released.
Credit hold A check box that indicates (if selected) that the customer is on credit hold, and its documents cannot be processed further.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period to post transactions generated by the document.
Customer order The reference number of the document used by the customer.
Customer The customer to be invoiced.
Location (This field only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location of the customer.
Contact The customer contact.
Currency The currency of the document.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Due date The due date of the document.
Cash discount date The date up to which the cash discount is available for the document, in accordance with the payment terms.
Child The customer ’s child account, where the associated order came from, if applicable.
Project The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window. Project appears if the Projects module has been activated.
Invoice text A short message to include in the invoice.
VAT exempt total (This field is available only if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in your system.) The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT taxable total

(This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in your system.) The document total that is subjected to VAT. The VAT taxable amount will only be displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field will be empty.

Note

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document will be added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

Balance The balance of the document.
Cash discount The cash discount amount taken or to be taken on the document.
ROT or RUT deductible document Select this check box if the amount on this document is applicable for ROT or RUT deduction. The ROT and RUT details tab will appear and the columns RUT or ROT deductible, Item type, Type of work and Deductible amount will be displayed in the Document details tab table.
Excise duty total The total of the amounts in the Excise duty amount column in the Document details tab.
## The Document details tab This tab holds the details of the document. Use the **Add order** action (and its associated dialog box) to easily add shipped orders to the document.
Button Description
Add order Opens the Add order dialog box, which you can use to add the orders to the invoice.
View schedule Navigates to the Deferral schedule window, so that you can view the details of the deferral schedule generated for the line.
Reset sorting Sorts the invoice lines in the table by the shipment numbers and sales order numbers.
### The Add order dialog box You can use this dialog box to add shipped orders of the same customer to the invoice if sales orders of this type have not been defined to be invoiced separately. The **Invoice separately** check box for order types is located in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.
Element Description
Order type The type of order to be added to the shipment.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment made to fulfill the sales order.
Customer The customer t receive the shipment.
Location (This column only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in your system.) The location of the customer to receive the shipment.
Shipment date The date of the shipment.
Shipment qty. The quantity of the item shipped.
The dialog box has the following buttons:
Add Adds the selected shipped orders.
Add and close Adds the selected orders and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The table
Column Description
Branch The branch where the shipment has been created.
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document included in this document.
Order type The type of the order that the shipment is based on.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Item ID The item ID of the shipped item.
Transaction descr. The description provided for the shipment.
Warehouse If the Multiple warehouses option is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the warehouse of the stock item is required for the customer invoice line. If you enter a customer invoice directly in this window, you can edit this column. For customer invoices prepared from shipments and sales orders, the system fills in this column automatically.
Location If the Multiple locations option is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, the location of the stock item is required for the customer invoice line. If you enter customer invoice directly in this window, you can edit this column. For customer invoices prepared from shipments and sales orders, the system fills in this column automatically.
Quantity The quantity of items in the shipment.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.
Lot/serial no. If the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000), this column is required for customer invoice lines with lot- or serial-tracked stock items.
Expiration date If the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000), this column is required for customer invoice lines with lot- or serial-tracked stock items.
Unit price The price of the unit of the shipped item.
Manual price

This check box indicates (if selected) that the unit price has been specified for this line item manually, corrected, or transferred from a sales order. In the invoice generated for the sales order, this check box is selected automatically for each line of the invoice to prevent price updating if new prices are in effect on the date of the invoice.

If you clear this check box, the system updates the unit price in the document line with the current price (if one is specified).

Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

The selected Manual discount check box indicates that the percent of the discount is specified by the line-discount applied manually, or has been entered manually, or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item in the sales order or in this invoice.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

The selected Manual discount check box indicates that the amount of the discount is based on the line discount applied manually, or has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually for this line item in the sales order on in this invoice.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.

Manual discount This check box indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually for this line item in the sales order or in this invoice. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount or you can select a discount code of one of the line discounts intended for manual application. The column is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Discount code The code of the line discount that has been applied to this line.
Discount series The identifier of a discount series that has been applied to this line. The column is hidden by default and only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Amount The amount of goods shipped.
Account The sales account to be updated. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Description The description provided for the account.
Subaccount The corresponding subaccount to be updated.
Project task The particular task of the project with which this document is associated. This column appears if the Projects module has been activated and integrated with the Inventory workspace.
Salesperson ID

(This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The salesperson associated with the sale of the items.

Deferral code

The deferral code assigned to the document line, if the line amount should be recognized as revenue over multiple periods. You can change the deferral code in this box manually, if needed.

Note

If you change the MDA deferral code (the deferral code that defines the item as an MDA package) to any non-MDA deferral code, the system will consider this item as not a package and will ignore its components while generating deferral schedule upon release of the document. That is, the system will generate the deferral schedule according to the selected non-MDA deferral code.

Note

Only active deferral codes are shown in the lookup. If you manually enter an inactive code, you will get an error message that the code is inactive.

Term start date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of recognition of the deferred revenue should start for the selected item; this date is specified if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

Term end date

(This column appears only if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The default date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date is specified if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

Excise duty amount The total excise duty amount for the line. The Date in the top part of the window determines which duty rate is used (from the Duty rates (EF207000) window).
Original deferral schedule The schedule generated in accordance with the deferral code assigned. Recognition of the line amount as income is performed according to the schedule.
VAT category The VAT category ID that applies to the goods. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Commissionable

(This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that indicates (if selected) that commissions should be calculated on this document.

External link A read-only column displaying the external link for the line, collected from the corresponding sales order.
Orig. inv. no. For the return lines, in this column, the system fills in a link to the original invoice.
Orig. inv. line no. For the return lines, in this column, the system fills in a link to the original invoice line number.
Inventory doc. type This column shows the type of the inventory document connected to the corresponding inventory issue that updated the inventory.
Inventory ref. no. This column shows a link to the corresponding inventory issue that updated the inventory.
Ref. no. The reference number of this document in which the line item is listed.
Trans. type The type of this transaction (document).
Line type

The line type for the customer invoice line, which can be one of the following options:

Misc. charge
for non-stock items that do not require shipment.
Goods for warehouse
for stock items.
Non-stock goods:
for non-stock items that require shipment.
Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
Order line no. The order’s line number that matches this line of the document.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates the number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table manually or by using the Reset sorting button.
## The VAT details tab The table on this tab, which is filled out automatically when you click **Save**, contains information about all individual VAT applied to the document lines.
Column Description
VAT ID The identifier of the specific VAT applied to the document.
Description The description of the VAT ID in clear language.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the tax.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific tax.
Reverse VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.
Statistical VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.
Pending VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT is pending and will be recognised after completing the VAT recognition process.
Include in VAT exempt total A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.
VAT type

The type of the VAT, which can be one of the following:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Commissions tab This tab only appears if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. It is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type. In this tab, you can view the commissions calculated for the document, or specify salespersons who participated in sales.
Element Description
Default salesperson The identifier of a salesperson to be used by default for each invoice line.
Total commissionable The total amount used to calculate commissions for all salespersons involved.
Commission amt. The total amount of commissions on the document.
### The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson who participated in sales.
Commission (%) The percent of commission generally earned by the salesperson.
Commission amt. The commission amount earned by the salesperson on this sale.
Commissionable amount The amount of the document subjected to commission.
## The Freight details tab This tab has a table with the shipments included in the invoice and all the freight charges applicable to the shipments. The freight details are read-only except for the Premium freight amt. To adjust the **Total freight amt.** in an invoice, you can specify the needed positive or negative amount in the **Premium freight amt.** field.
Column Description
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document.
Shipping terms The shipping terms specified in the shipment document.
Shipping zone ID The customer’s shipping zone.
Ship via The carrier through which shipping was performed.
Weight The weight of the shipment.
Volume The volume of the shipment.
Line total The total amount on all lines of the shipment document.
Freight cost The cost of freight for the invoice.
Freight amt. The charges for shipping the items.
Premium freight amt. Any additional flat charges for handling the shipments. You can use this box to adjust total freight charges for an invoice.
Total freight amt. The total of all freight charges.
Account The account used for recording freight charges.
Description The description provided for the account.
Sub. ID The corresponding subaccount.
Project task The task of the project.
VAT category The tax category of the freight charge.
## The Financial details tab This tab provides information about the batch generated for the document.
Element Description
Batch no. The reference number of the batch that contains all the transactions generated by the document. You can click the number to view the batch.
Branch The branch where the invoice originated.
Customer ledger account The asset account to be updated by the document amount.
Customer ledger sub The corresponding subaccount to be used for the document.
Customer VAT zone By default, the VAT zone associated with the customer location. If such a VAT zone is not specified, it is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.
Work group The work group responsible for the shipment.
Owner The user responsible for the shipment.
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the Buyer’s financial accounts.
Originator document ref. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.
Contract document ref. The identification of a contract.
Customer project The project number requested by the customer. When a project number is entered in this field, it will replace the internal project number when sending to AutoInvoice for VismaXML and PEPPOL BIS. When nothing is filled in, the internal project number will be sent to AutoInvoice.
## The Payment information tab By using this tab, you can select a payment method for the invoice. If the payment method involves credit card processing, you can initiate payment processing. The tab provides information about processing centre transactions.
Element Description
Payment method The payment method of the customer to be used to pay for the invoice.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Clear date The date when the payment was cleared with the bank.
Cleared A check box that indicates (if selected) that the payment was cleared with the bank.
Payment total The total amount of the payment.
Amount to capture The amount to be charged on the card.
Registered amount The amount captured on the customer account associated with the card as the payment for the invoice.
Orig. PC ref. no. This field is not in use.
## The Invoice address tab This tab contains the customer's invoice-to information. ### The Invoice contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to indicate that the default contact should not be used and to specify a new contact.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
### The Invoice address section
Element Description
Override address A check box that you select to indicate that the default address should not be used and to specify a new address.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Print and email options section
Element Description
Printed A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice has been printed.
Do not print A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice will not be printed.
Emailed A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice hast been sent by email.
Do not email A check box that you select to indicate that the invoice will not be sent by email.
### The Report settings section
Element Description
Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents A check box that you select to indicate that the note will be printed on external sales documents.
Print line note on internal sales documents A check box that you select to indicate that the note will be printed on internal sales documents.
### The AutoInvoice section In this tab you find the AutoInvoice sending information. Here, you also find the invoice response message, if you have activated this functionality in the [AutoInvoice settings (CS10250S)](/visma-net-erp/help/management/management-windows/autoinvoice-settings-cs10250s/) window, and the customer has activated this from their side. For more information, see: [About invoice response messages](/visma-net-erp/help/customer-ledger/process-invoices/about-invoice-response-messages/).
Element Description
Sent to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document was sent to AutoInvoice.
Send to AutoInvoice A check box that indicates (if selected) that the document will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sending method Indicates which path the AutoInvoice was sent by: Standard or Consumer.
AutoInvoice status

Shows the status of processing. Available statuses are:

Sent to AutoInvoice
Awaiting processing.
Pending
Awaiting delivery.
Sent
The invoice is sent.
Error
To check why an error occurred, you have to go to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice sent by

Shows how the invoice was sent. Possible values are:

  • Sent inside home network
  • Sent by email
  • Sent by print
  • Sent by print PRIORITY
  • Sent by print WORLD
  • Sent e-Invoice
  • Sent to bank network
  • Sent by N/A
Business level status

The status of the invoice as sent by the customer. It can be one of the following:

  • Message acknowledgment
  • In process
  • Under query
  • Conditionally accepted
  • Rejected
  • Accepted
  • Paid

To get the current status, click the Actions button and select Poll invoice status.

Reason code The reason given by the customer to clarify the business level status. This text is predefined, see this status clarification reason list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible reason codes.
Reason Text entered manually by the customer.
Action code The action the customer wants you to take for this invoice. This text is predefined, see this status clarification action list global-css-new-window-16 for all possible action codes.
Action Text entered manually by the customer.
## The Discount details tab This tab has a table that shows the details of the **Group** - and **Document** -level discounts that were applied to the document. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - and Document -level discount for the invoice. Selecting the check box updates the document’s total and the line amounts but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Order type The type of the sales order.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order.
Discount code The identifier (code) of the discount applied to the document.
Series ID The identifier of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose sequence was applied to the document ( Group, or Document ).
Manual discount This check box indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually (from the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as manual in the Discount codes - reference information window.
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as a discount.
## The Applications tab This tab has a table showing the payments applied to this document. This tab is not available for documents of the **Cash sales** and **Cash return** types.
Button Description
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window in a pop-up window so that you can view the document details or application, depending on the document type.
Apply automatically Automatically applies the available payments to the document. The button is available if the Invoice type is selected in the top part of this window.
### If you select Invoice or Debit note in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Doc. type The type of the payment document.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document. When you click this number, the Sales invoices (AR301000) window or the Customer payments (AR302000) opens as a pop-up depending on the document type, so that you can view the document details.
Amount paid The amount specified by the payment document.
Cash discount taken The amount of cash discount taken during the application of the payment.
Payment date The date of the payment.
Balance The balance of the invoice after payment application.
Invoice text The description of the payment document.
Currency The currency of the transactions.
Payment period The period to which the payment transactions are posted.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment document.
Customer The customer to which the payment document belongs.
Status The status of the payment.
### If you select Credit note in the top part, the table columns look like this
Column Description
Document type The type of the document that was applied.
Reference no The reference number of the applied document. By clicking this number, the document details window opens.
Customer The ID of the customer account.
Amount paid The amount that was actually paid which is displayed in the currency of the document that is selected in the window.
Date The date of the document.
Balance The balance of the document after the credit note was applied.
Invoice text The description of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Post period The period to which the document transactions are posted.
Customer order A reference to a document of the customer, such as a purchase order number (for informational purposes).
Status The status of the document.
## The Totals tab On the **Totals** tab, you can view the totals automatically calculated for the document.
Element Description
Line total

The total amount on all document lines with stock items and non-stock items that require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied. This total does not include the excise duty, freight and premium freight amounts.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Amount column on the Document details tab for lines of the Goods for warehouse and Non-stock goods line type.

Line total incl. excise duty The Line total incl. excise duty is calculated as the Line total + Excise duty total.
Misc. total

The total amount on all document lines with non-stock items that do not require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Amount column on the Document details tab for lines with the Misc. charge line type.

Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document. This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Discount details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The total amount of VAT calculated for the document.
Freight The amount of freight charges.
Premium freight Any additional flat charge that applies to the document for shipping and handling.
Payment total The total amount of payments for this invoice.
Registered amount The payment amount registered as the result of card processing.
## The ROT and RUT details (Sweden) tab This tab is displayed when you select the **ROT or RUT deductible document** check box in the top part of this window. ### The ROT and RUT settings section
Element Description
Distribute automatically (check box) (check box) When this check box is selected, the amount will be distributed equally among the specified personal IDs.
RUT (check box) (check box) Select this option if the work is related to RUT (cleaning, maintenance, laundry) deduction.
ROT (check box) (check box) Select this check box if the work is related to ROT (repairs, conversion, extension) deduction. When you select this, you need to fill in either the Property field, or the Apartment and Corporate ID fields.
Apartment The apartment number.
Property The property number.
Corporate ID The housing cooperative’s ID.
### The ROT and RUT distribution section Here you can add the person(s) who will receive the tax deduction.
Column Description
Personal ID (YYYYMMDDNNNN) The personal ID in the format YYYYMMDDNNNN.
Amount The amount distributed to this person. If the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, you can edit this field and manually distribute the amount among the personal IDs.
Over 65 A check box that you select to indicate that this person is over 65 years old. This is not done automatically.
### The ROT and RUT totals section
Elemant Description
Total deductible amount The total amount that is tax deductible.
Other cost The total amount for items of the Other cost type, including VAT.
Material cost The total amount for items of the Material cost type, including VAT.
Work price The total price of labour hours (items of the Service type), including VAT. This is the amount eligible for tax deduction.
Distributed amount or Undistributed amount

When the Distribute automatically check box is selected, this will display the total amount distributed among the specified personal IDs.

When the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, this will display the amount still to be distributed manually among the specified personal IDs.

### The Balancing documents for ROT and RUT deduction section This section appears after the invoice is balanced, which is either after releasing the invoice or when sending the claim, depending on your setting for **Balance invoices on** on the **ROT and RUT settings (Sweden)** tab in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. You can also invoke the balancing of invoices manually by using the **Balance** action in the [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/) window.
Element Description
Balancing credit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing credit note to the customer, with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
Balancing debit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing debit note to Skatteverket (The Swedish Tax Agency), with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
## The Attachments tab On this tab, you can view and send invoice attachments to AutoInvoice.
Column Description
View file View the selected attachment file.
Send the file to AutoInvoice When this is selected, the file will be sent to AutoInvoice with the invoice.
Name The name of the file.
Created by The user who has created the file.
Creation time The time when the file was created.
Comment An optional comment connected with the file.
File size The size of the file to be sent.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Order types (SO201000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000 page You can use this window to view the settings of available order types. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order types (SO201000) You can use this window to view the settings of available order types. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. For descriptions of the predefined order types, see: [About predefined types of sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-predefined-types-of-sales-orders/) and [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/). > [!NOTE] > You can create new order types only if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. To create new order types, use one of the templates (which are groups of settings for typical order types) and make changes only in the **Order settings**, **Posting settings**, and **Customer ledger settings** sections on the **General information** tab. We do not recommend that you make changes to any available template on the **Template settings** tab, because this requires in-depth knowledge of the built-in automation behaviours associated with order types. For details about creating custom order types, see: [About custom order types](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-custom-order-types/). In the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window, users can create orders of both the types predefined in Visma Net and custom order types (if this functionality is enabled in your system). ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part This area provides summary information about the order type. In this area, you can select an available order type and view and edit its settings, or create a new order type and specify its general settings (if the **Custom order types** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window).
Element Description
Order type

The ID of the order type, which is a two-character alphanumeric string. Visma Net provides the following predefined order types:

CM (Credit note)
Documents of this type are used as adjustments to already-completed sales orders when the customer returns goods without advance authorization.
CR (Cash return)
Documents of this type are used to register returns from cash sales that did not involve shipping.
CS (Cash sale)
Documents of this type are used to register cash sales.
IN (Invoice)
Documents of this type are used to bill a customer for shipped goods.
QT (Quote)
Documents of this type are used to register a customer’s intention to buy goods in the specified quantity, on the specified date, and at the specified price.
RC (Return for credit)
Documents of this type are used to register authorised customer returns for credit without replacement.
RM (Generic authorised return)
Documents of this type are used to register authorised customer returns for replacement or credit within the warranty period of a product.
RR (Return with replacement)
Documents of this type are used to register authorised customer returns for replacement.
SA (Sales order with allocation)
(This type of order is only available if the Lot and serial tracking, Multiple warehouse locations, or Sales order to purchase order link functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) You have to manually allocate the ordered quantities of the items at one location or multiple locations if the available quantity at the specified location is less than the ordered quantity. Once you save an order of this type, the quantities of items are added to the SO allocated plan types.
SO (Sales order)
Documents of this type are created to record customer requests to purchase goods and are used to prepare shipments.
TR (Transfer)
Documents of this type are generated to perform stock replenishment by transferring goods from the source warehouse. (This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Active A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order type is active, which means that users can create documents of the type.
Description

The brief description of the order type.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

Order template

The order template that the order type is based on. The following templates are available:

CM (Credit note)
The built-in template for the CM order type
CR (Cash return)
The built-in template for the CR order type
IN (Invoice)
The built-in template for the IN and CS order types
QT (Quote)
The built-in template for the QT order type
RC (Return for credit)
The built-in template for the RC order type
RM (RMA order)
The built-in template for the RM order type
RR (Return with replacement)
The built-in template for the RR order type
SA (Sales order with allocation)
The built-in template for the SA order type
SO (Sales order)
The built-in template for the SO order type
TR (Transfer)
The built-in template for the TR order type (This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window)
## The General information tab The tab contains settings that hold details about the order type. ### The Order settings section
Element Description
Order number series The number series to be used to automatically generate reference numbers for documents of this type.
Days to keep The number of days documents of the type should be kept in the system before they are removed as obsolete.
Hold orders on entry This check box indicates (if selected) that the system should save documents of the type with the On hold status by default.
Hold document on failed credit check

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system will change the status of the order to Credit hold if the customer fails the credit check.

The credit check is performed each time the order is saved.

Require control total This check box indicates (if selected) that the user must type the control total when creating or modifying a document of the type.
Invoice separately This check box indicates (if selected) that each order of this type should be billed (invoiced) separately from other orders of the same type.
Ship separately This check box indicates (if selected) that the goods for each order of this type should be shipped separately from goods for other orders of the same type.
Calculate freight This check box indicates (if selected) that the freight for each order of this type should be calculated.
Commitment tracking

(This element is only available if the Internal revenue commitment tracking check box is selected in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that commitment tracking is activated for the order type. See also: About tracking commitments.

Copy notes This check box indicates (if selected) that when an order of this type is copied to an order of another type, the system should also copy any notes for the order.
Copy attachments This check box indicates (if selected) that when an order of this type is copied to an order of another type, the system should also copy any attachments to the order.
Copy line notes to shipment This check box indicates (if selected) that when a shipment is created for a line of an order of this type, the system should copy any line notes to the shipment as shipment line notes.
Copy line attachments to shipment This check box indicates (if selected) that when a shipment is created for a line of an order of this type, the system should copy any line attachments to the shipment as shipment line attachments.
Copy line notes to invoice This check box indicates (if selected) that when a user creates an invoice for a line of an order of this type, the system should copy line notes to the invoice as invoice line notes.
Only non-stock

(This element is only available if the Copy line notes to invoice option is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system copies line notes for only non-stock line items.

Copy line attachments to invoice This check box indicates (if selected) that when a user creates an invoice for a line of an order of this type, the system copies any attachments to the invoice as invoice line attachments.
Only non-stock

(This element is only available if the Copy line attachments to invoice option is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that the system must copy line attachments for only non-stock line items.

### The Customer ledger settings section
Element Description
Invoice number series The numbering sequence to be used for generating the reference numbers for customer ledger documents (invoices and credit memos) created when shipments for the order are confirmed.
Mark as: printed A check box that, if selected, indicates that the documents of this type will be marked as printed before release.
Mark as: emailed A check box that, if selected, indicates that the documents of this type will be marked as emailed before release.
Hold Invoices on entry A check box that you select to indicate to the system that new invoices should be saved with the On Hold status by default.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Use sales account from

The sales account to be used for the document of this type. You can select one of the following options:

Item
Uses the sales account selected for the item, which is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window.
Warehouse
Uses the sales account selected for the warehouse, which is specified on the General ledger accounts tab of the Warehouses (IN204000) window. (This option is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Posting class
Uses the sales account according to the selected option for the Use sales account from field in the Posting classes tab of the Posting classes (IN206000) window. This option appears only if the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
Customer location
Uses the sales account selected for the customer location. (This option is only displayed if the Business Account Locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Reason code
Uses the sales account associated with the reason code set on the sales order line.

See also: About suggested sales accounts.

Combine sales sub. from

The rule of composing a sales subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the item, posting class, warehouse, customer location, salesperson, and employee).

To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

E
The sales subaccount associated with the employee who is the owner of the document.
I
The sales subaccount associated with the item.
L
The sales subaccount associated with the customer location. (This option appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
W
The sales subaccount associated with the warehouse. (This option appears only if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
S
The sales subaccount associated with the salesperson.
P
The sales subaccount associated with the posting class of the item.
R
The sales subaccount associated with the reason code.

For a segment, the selected option is designated by the specific letter repeated for each character in the segment.

Freight account

(Required.)

The default account of the Income type to record freight to be charged for orders of the type. This account is used as one of the sources for the Use freight account from rule and as the freight account when the account defined by the rule is unavailable.

For more information, see: About freight calculation.

Use freight account from

The freight account to be used for orders of this type. You can select one of the following options:

Order type
Uses the freight account selected for the order type, which is specified on this window, in the Freight account field.
Customer location
Uses the freight account selected for the customer location. (This option is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Ship via
Uses the freight account associated with the carrier, which is specified in the Ship via codes (CS207500) window.
Freight sub.

(Required.)

The default subaccount to record the freight for orders of this type. This subaccount is a source of segment values for the segments with the T option for the freight subaccount generated according to the Combine freight sub. from rule; it is also a source of segment values when other sources are unavailable.

Combine freight sub. from

The rule of composing a freight sales subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document. To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

E
The freight subaccount associated with the employee who is the owner of the order; the source of the segment value is Sales sub. on the Financial settings tab of the Employees (EP203000) window for the employee who is the owner of the order. If two or more orders with different owners are combined into one shipment (the Ship separately check box is cleared for the order), the segment value will be taken from the Sales Sub. specified for the customer location.
L
The freight subaccount associated with customer location. (This option is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
T
The freight subaccount associated with the order type, which is specified in the Freight sub. field.
V
The freight subaccount associated with the ship via code specified for the order.
Discount account

(Required.)

The default account to record discounts for orders of the type. This account is used as one of the sources for the Use discount account from rule; it is also used if the account defined by the rule is unavailable.

Use discount account from

The discount account to be used for a document of this type. You can select one of the following options:

Order type
Uses the discount account selected for the order type, which is specified in the Discount account field on this window.
Customer location
Uses the discount account selected for the customer location. (This option only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Discount sub.

(Required.)

The default subaccount to record discounts on orders of the type. This subaccount is a source of segment values for the segments with the T option for the discount subaccount generated according to the Combine discount sub. from rule; the subaccount is also a source of segment values in case when other sources are unavailable.

Combine discount sub. from

(This element is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The rule of composing a discount subaccount from other subaccounts associated with the document (those defined for the order type and customer location). To set up the rule, select a segment, press F3, and select the source of the segment value, which is one of the following options:

L
The discount subaccount associated with customer location. (This option appears only if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
T
The discount subaccount associated with order type, which is specified in the Discount sub. field on this window.
Post line discounts separately

(This element is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that (if selected) indicates that on release of invoices generated for orders of this type, the general ledger batches will include the following additional journal entries (with the discount amounts) for the line discounts:

  • Credit entry to the Sales account (determined by the Use sales account from setting of the order type)
  • Debit entry to the Discount account associated with the customer (determined by the Use discount account from setting of the order type)

If this check box is cleared, line discount are not posted to GL.

Use discount sub. from sales sub.

(This element is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that (if selected) indicates that discounts will be posted with sales subaccounts.

This check box is only displayed if the Post line discounts separately check box is selected.

## The Template settings tab This tab provides information about the template the order type is based on. The template defines how the orders of the type should be processed. For details, see: [About sales order processing options](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/about-sales-order-processing-options/) and [About predefined order types for customer returns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/about-predefined-order-types-for-customer-returns/). CAUTION: We do not recommend that you modify the available templates.
Element Description
Automation behaviour The type of automation behaviour used for the template, which can be Sales order, Invoice, Quote, Credit note, or RMA order. An automation behaviour is a set of automation steps.
Default operation The default inventory operation for the order type, which can be Receipt or Issue.
Customer document type

The type of customer ledger document to be generated on release of a document of this type.

Possible settings are Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, and No update (which means no customer ledger documents will be created).

Process shipments This check box indicates (if selected) that shipments should be processed for this order type.
Require lot/serial entry

This check box indicates (if selected) that lot or serial information for items is required for documents of this type. Items with specific lot or serial numbers are always allocated.

This check box can be selected for only order types for which the Process shipments check box is selected.

Require stock allocation

This check box indicates (if selected) that orders of this type require allocation (reservation) of stock when they are taken off hold.

For orders of the type with the Require lot/serial entry check box cleared, the items should be allocated even if particular lot or serial numbers are not specified on orders.

Column Description
Operation The inventory operation to be generated for the order of the type.
Inventory transaction type

The type of inventory issue transaction generated for a document of this type, which can be one of the following options:

Issue
A document that confirms the delivery of items from the warehouse
Return
A document that records the return of goods from the customer
Transfer:
A document that records the transfer of items from one warehouse to another
Invoice
A document that confirms the delivery of items from the warehouse based on the customer ledger invoice
Debit note
A document that adjusts the delivery of goods from the warehouse based on the customer ledger debit note
Credit note
A document that records the return of goods to the warehouse based on the customer ledger credit note
No update
A type indicating that no inventory transaction will be generated and no shipment will be processed

You can see issue transactions in the Issues - reference information window.

Order plan type The type of built-in order plan to be used for the documents of the type.
Shipment plan type The type of built-in shipment plan to be used for the documents of the type.
Require reason code

A check box that indicates (if selected) that a reason code is required for orders of the type.

(This check box is available for the Sales order and RMA order automation behaviours.)

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Print/email orders (SO502000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/print-email-orders-so502000 page You use this window to print or email sales orders, depending on the order properties. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Print/email orders (SO502000) You use this window to print or email sales orders, depending on the order properties. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to print or email sales orders, depending on the order properties. The functionality of this window is based on the automation steps designed for the windows in the Inventory workspace. By adjusting the automation step, you can define which of the orders should be emailed and which should be printed by using this window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Processes the selected orders—that is, those in the table for which you have selected the check boxes, based on the selected Action.
Process all Processes all orders (listed in the table) according to the selected Action.
## The top part You can use this part to specify the criteria for selecting orders for processing.
Element Description
Action

The action to be taken if you click Process or Process all in the toolbar. Select one of the following:

  • Print sales order/quote
  • Send by email
Assigned to

A field and the Me check box, which you use as follows to select the user to whom the orders are assigned:

  • Select the Me check box to view the orders assigned to you. The field will contain your username.
  • Clear the Me check box and select another username to view the orders assigned to the user.
  • Leave the elements blank to view orders assigned to all users of the selected work group or all groups.
Work group

A field and the My check box, which you use as follows to select the work group the orders are assigned to:

  • Select the My check box to view the orders assigned to your work group or to the selected user in the group.
  • Clear the My check box and select another work group in the field to display the orders assigned to the work group or to a particular product manager in the selected group.
  • Leave the field blank and clear the check box to view the orders assigned to all work groups.
Salesperson ID

The particular salesperson related to the sales orders.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all salespersons.

Customer

The particular customer whose sales orders you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all customers.

Order type

The appropriate order type.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all types.

Status The status of orders to be displayed in the list. You can select orders by their statuses: Order, Open, On hold, Credit hold, Completed, Cancelled, Back order, Shipping, and Invoiced.
Start date The date to open the date range for selecting orders by their dates.
End date The date to end the date range for selecting orders by their dates. By default, it is the current business date.
## The table This table holds all the sales orders that match the selection criteria you've specified. You can process all listed items or only those you select.
Column Description
Order type The type of the order.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Description The description provided for the order.
Customer order The reference number of the original customer’s order.
Status The status of the order.
Requested on The date when the order should be fulfilled.
Sched. shipment The date when the order should be shipped.
Customer The customer, by its ID, that has initiated the order.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Location

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The location of the customer related to the order.

Location name

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The name of the customer location.

Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse from which the sales order will be shipped.
Description The description of the warehouse.
Ship via The ship via code associated with the carrier through which the order should be shipped.
Description The description of the ship via code.
Shipping zone The shipping zone of the customer.
Work group The work group assigned to handle the order.
Owner The default user (owner) of the work group.
Order weight The weight of the order.
Order volume The volume of the order.
Ordered qty. The total quantity of items on the order.
Currency The currency of the order.
Order total The total amount specified on the order.

Related pages

Concepts

Process sales invoices (SO505000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-sales-invoices-so505000 page In this window, you can perform a variety of processing actions on multiple sales invoices and notes. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process sales invoices (SO505000) In this window, you can perform a variety of processing actions on multiple sales invoices and notes. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. In this window, you can perform a variety of processing actions on multiple sales invoices and notes. You can specify selection criteria to narrow the list of invoices and notes in the window. You can then process all the documents on the list or only the ones you select. If you release the invoices and notes, the related inventory transactions will be also created. The prepared inventory documents will be released automatically if the **Automatically release inventory documents** option is selected in the [Sales order preferences (SO101000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000/) window; otherwise, you need to manually release these documents. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View document Click this to view the document selected in the table in the Customer invoices window that pops up.
Process Applies the selected processing (based on the option you have specified in the Action field) to the selected documents.
Process all Applies the selected processing to all documents.
## The top part Here, you can choose the date range and customer for which documents will displayed, as well as the operation the system performs if you click **Process** or **Process all**.
Element Description
Action

The processing operation the system performs when you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following options:

  • Release To release the selected documents.

  • Post invoice to inventory To update the availability data in the Inventory workspace in accordance with the selected documents.

  • Release from credit hold To release the documents from credit hold so they can be saved with the Balanced status.

  • Print invoice To print the selected invoices for sending them by postal mail. The document selected for processing will be printed only if the following conditions are met: For more details, see: About mailings for customers.

    • This document has not been printed before (the Printed check box is cleared in the Customer invoices (SO303000) window)
    • The customer account has the Print invoices check box selected
    • The Credit hold check box is not selected for this document
  • Poll invoice status

  • Email invoice To email the selected invoices. The document selected for processing will be emailed only if the following conditions are met:

    • This document has not been e-mailed before (the Emailed check box is cleared in the Customer invoices (SO303000) window)
    • The customer account has the Send invoices by email check box selected
    • The Credit hold check box is not selected for this document

For more details, see: About mailings for customers.

Customer The customer (by its ID) for which you want to display documents.
Start date The start date of the date range for which you want to display documents.
End date The end date of the date range for which you want to display documents.
## The table This table displays the sales invoices that meet the selection criteria you have specified. You can process all documents or only those you select.
Button Description
View document Navigates to the Customer invoices (SO303000) window so that you can view all the details of the selected document.
Column Description
Type

The type of document, which can be one of the following options:

  • Invoice For a document used to invoice a customer for goods shipped
  • Credit note For a document used to credit a customer for returned goods
  • Debit note For a document used to correct undercharging invoices
  • Cash sale
  • Credit return
Reference no. The reference number of the document.
Customer The customer that ordered goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered goods or services.
Location

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services were ordered.

Location name

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The name of the location from which the goods or services were ordered.

Customer order The reference number of the document as assigned by the customer.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period to post the transactions generated by the document.
Amount The amount of the document.
Currency The currency of the document.
Invoice text The description provided for the document.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Email (This column is only available when you select the Email invoice action.) The email address to which the invoice will be sent.

Related pages

Concepts

Process orders (SO501000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-orders-so501000 page You use this window to specify criteria for filtering the sales orders and then to process all of the listed orders or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process orders (SO501000) You use this window to specify criteria for filtering the sales orders and then to process all of the listed orders or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to specify criteria for filtering the sales orders and then to process all of the listed orders or only selected ones. By using this window, you can create shipment for the selected orders, prepare invoices or cancel the orders. Also, you can release the orders from credit hold and open them. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Applies the selected processing (based on the Action you select) to the documents you have selected in the table.
Process all Applies the selected processing to all documents listed in the table.
## The top part You use this area to define criteria for the documents to be displayed in the table below, as well as the action to be applied if you click **Process** or **Process all**.
Element Description
Action

The processing operation to be used when you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following options:

Prepare invoice
To generate invoices for the Closed orders.
Release from credit hold
To release the sales order from credit hold if the customer passes the credit check.
Cancel order
To cancel an order of any status.
Create shipment
To create shipments for orders with the Open, Back order or Shipping status. During this processing for any order, if no shipment is created due to the shipping rules specified for the order and the order lines, the status of this order changes to Back order. If the Replan back orders check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window, you can run the process of creating shipments for back orders after the purchase receipts for the appropriate items have been released. If the Replan back orders check box is not selected, you need to open the back orders first. For more information, see: About shipping rules.
Open order
To open orders with the Back order status.
Select by

The type of date by which the orders should be selected. Select one of the following options:

Ship date
To select documents by the date of planned shipment specified for each order line in the Ship on column on the Document details or Order lines tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) or Sales orders (SO30100S) window, respectively.
Cancel by
To select documents by the date of order cancellation
Order date
To select documents by their creation dates
Start date The start date of the date range for the type of dates specified in Select by. You can leave the field blank to view all orders with dates before the End date.
Shipment date

(This field is only displayed if the Create shipment is selected in the Action field.)

The date of the shipment or shipments to be created. By default, it is the current business date, but you can change it to another date.

End date The end date of the date range for the type of dates specified as Select by.
Customer

The customer involved.

Leave the field blank to view orders (that should be fulfilled) from various customers.

Carrier This field is not in use.
Ship via The ship via code associated with the carrier used to ship sales orders. Leave the field blank to view orders to be shipped with various ship via codes.
Warehouse

The warehouse from which the orders will be shipped.

(This field is only displayed if the Create shipment is selected in the Action field.)

## The table This table displays the documents matching the criteria specified in the top part. Review the list, and process all documents or only those you have selected using the check boxes in the first column.
Button Description
View document Navigates to the Sales orders (SO301000) window so you can view the details of the selected document.
Column Description
Order type The type of order.
Order no. The reference number of the document.
Description The description provided for the document.
Customer order The reference number if the original customer order.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Requested on The date on which the customer wants to receive the goods.
Sched. shipment

The date when the shipment for this order is scheduled (as specified in the Sched. shipment or Scheduled shipment field on the Delivery settings tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) or Sales orders (SO30100S) window, respectively).

If the scheduled shipment date is later than the range’s end date, that means that at least one line of the order was scheduled to be shipped in the selected date range (has the Ship on date in the range).

Customer The customer that ordered the goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered the goods or services.
Location (This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in your system.) The customer location from which the goods or services were ordered.
Location name The name of the location from which the goods or services were ordered.
Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse specified as the preferred warehouse for the order.
Warehouse description The description provided for the warehouse.
Ship via The carrier through which the goods are shipped.
Ship via description The description provided for the carrier.
Shipping zone The shipping zone of the customer.
Work group The work group processing the order.
Owner The user responsible for the order.
Order weight The total weight of the goods associated with the order.
Order volume The total volume of the goods associated with the order.
Ordered qty. The quantity of all items on the order.
Currency The currency of the document.
Order total The total for the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Process shipments (SO503000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/process-shipments-so503000 page In this window, you can select the type of processing, specify criteria for filtering the shipments, and process all of the filtered shipments or only selected ones. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Process shipments (SO503000) In this window, you can select the type of processing, specify criteria for filtering the shipments, and process all of the filtered shipments or only selected ones. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Process Applies the chosen processing to the selected documents.
Process all Applies the chosen processing to all documents.
## The top part Here, you can define criteria for the documents to be displayed in the table.
Element Description
Action

The processing option to be used when you click Process or Process all. Select one of the following processing options:

  • Prepare invoice To generate invoices for the selected shipment documents.
  • Update warehouse To generate inventory documents for confirmed shipments made for sales orders (SO, SA) and some of returns. The issues will be released automatically if the Automatically release inventory documents check box is selected in the Sales orders preferences (SO101000) window.
  • Update warehouse - Confirm not invoiceable To generate inventory documents for shipments made for transfer orders and returns with replacements.
  • Email shipment: To generate emails with the shipment confirmation for the selected shipments.
  • Print pick list To create and print pick lists for the selected shipments with the On hold and Open statuses.
  • Confirm shipment To confirm the selected shipment.
  • Print shipment confirmation To print confirmations for the selected shipments.
  • Prepare drop-ship invoice To prepare drop-ship invoices for the selected receipts. When you select this processing option, the system displays in the table the list of receipts instead of shipments. (This option is only available if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Start date The start date of the date range for the shipment dates. You can leave the field blank to view all shipments up to the End date.
End date The end date of the date range for the shipment dates.
Invoice date The date of the applicable invoice.
Show printed

(This element only appears if one of the following actions is selected in the Action field: Print labels or Print pick list.)

  • For the Print pick list action, you select this check box to add to the listed shipments those shipments for which pick lists have been already printed.
  • For the Print labels action, you select this check box to add to the listed shipments those shipments for which labels have been already printed.
Customer The customer whose shipments will be displayed. Leave the field blank to view shipments for all customers.
Carrier This field is not in use.
Ship via The ship via code associated with the carrier which will perform or has performed shipping. You can leave the box blank to view shipments with all ship via codes of the carrier.
Warehouse (This field only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse from which the goods are shipped. You can leave the field blank to view shipments associated with all warehouses.
Packaging type The packaging type: Auto and manual, Auto, or Manual. In case an order has been packed manually, no re-packaging can be performed.
## The Shipments table This displays the shipments that match the criteria you specified in the top part. You can review the list and process all the shipments or only selected ones.
Button Description
View document Navigates to the Shipments (SO302000) window, so that you can view all the details of the selected document.
If you select in the **Action** field an option other than **Prepare drop-ship invoice**, the system displays in the table the list of shipments available for processing.
Column Description
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Shipment date The date when the goods were shipped.
Customer no. The customer number of the customer who ordered the goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered the goods or services.
Location

(This column only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services are ordered.

Location name The name of the location from which the goods or services are ordered.
Customer order The reference number of the order.
Warehouse ID The warehouse from which the shipment was performed.
Warehouse description The name of the warehouse.
Work group The work group that prepared the shipment and shipped the goods.
Owner The user responsible for the shipment.
Shipped quantity The quantity of the shipped items.
Ship via The carrier used for this shipment.
Ship via description The description provided for the carrier.
Shipped weight The total weight of goods in the shipment.
Shipped volume The total volume of goods in the shipment.
Labels printed This check box (if selected) indicates that labels have been printed for this shipment.
## The Receipts table If you select the **Prepare drop-ship invoice** option in the **Action** field, the system displays in the table the list of receipts available for processing.
Column Description
Receipt no. The reference number of the receipt document.
Status The status of the document, which is assigned automatically.
Date The date of the document.
Customer no. The customer number of the customer who ordered the goods or services.
Customer name The name of the customer that ordered the goods or services.
Location

(This column only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services are ordered.

Location name The name of the location from which the goods or services are ordered.
Customer order The reference number of the order.
Warehouse ID The warehouse from which the shipment was performed.
Warehouse description The name of the warehouse.
Work group The work group that prepared the shipment and shipped the goods.
Owner The user responsible for the shipment.
Shipped quantity The quantity of the shipped items.
Ship via The carrier used for this shipment.
Ship via description The description provided for the carrier.
Shipped weight The total weight of goods in the shipment.
Shipped volume The total volume of goods in the shipment.
Labels printed A check box that, if selected indicates that labels have been printed for this shipment.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Order confirmation (SO64111S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-so64111s section By using this report, you can display the selected order as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order confirmation (SO64111S) By using this report, you can display the selected order as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. By using this report, you can display the selected order as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the top left), the ship-to and invoice-to address of the customer, the pertinent shipping information, and the itemised information about goods shipped. > [!NOTE] > If you have added line notes in the order, only the first three lines of each note are displayed in the report. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view; a type must be specified. For this report window, the default type is a sales order, but you can select any type.
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Order confirmation, right address (SO64118S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-right-address-so64118s section You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order confirmation, right address (SO64118S) You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report: This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Report parameters tab
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view. For this report window, the default type is a sales order, but you can select any type.
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Quote, right address (SO64108S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/quote-right-address-so64108s section With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Quote, right address (SO64108S) With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the top left), the ship-to and invoice-to address of the customer (on the right), the pertinent shipping information, and the itemised information about goods to be shipped. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view; a type must be specified. (Although by default the type of sales order is a quote on this report window, you can select any type.)
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Reprint invoices (SO50501S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/reprint-invoices-so50501s page You use this window to reprint invoices. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Reprint invoices (SO50501S) You use this window to reprint invoices. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You use this window to reprint invoices. The functionality of this window is based on the automation steps designed for the windows in the Inventory workspace. By adjusting the automation step, you can define which of the orders should be emailed and which should be printed by using this window. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View document Click this to see the underlying document for the invoice.
Process Processes the selected orders or those in the table for which you have selected the check boxes based on the selected Action.
Process all Processes all orders (listed in the table) according to the selected Action.
## The top part You can use this part to specify the criteria for selecting orders for processing.
Element Description
Action

The action to be taken if you click Process or Process all in the toolbar. Select one of the following:

  • Reprint invoices
Customer

The particular customer whose sales orders you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view orders of all customers.

Start date The date to open the date range for selecting orders by their dates.
End date The date to end the date range for selecting orders by their dates. By default, it is the current business date.
## The table This table holds all the sales orders that match the selection criteria you've specified. You can process all listed items or only those you select.
Column Description
Type The type of the order.
Reference no. The reference number of the order.
Customer The customer, by its ID, that has initiated the order.
Customer name The name of the customer.
Location

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The location of the customer related to the order.

Location name

(This column is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The name of the customer location.

Customer order The reference number of the document used by the customer.
Status The status of the invoice. This can be: Credit hold, On hold, Balanced, Voided, Scheduled, Open, Closed, Pending print, Pending email, and Reserved.
Date The date of the document.
Post period The financial period to post transactions generated by the document.
Amount The total amount of the document
Currency The currency of the invoice.
Invoice text The additional invoice description entered in the top part of the document.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.

Related pages

Windows

Sales invoices history by item (SO40104S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-invoices-history-by-item-so40104s page You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on all released invoices created from sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales invoices history by item (SO40104S) You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on all released invoices created from sales orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on sales invoice lines that have a connection to a sales order. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the invoice history for.
Item class The item class of the items to be included in the report. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class The class of the customers to be included in the report.
Salesperson The salesperson for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
## The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

Sales by item and customer (AR40103S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-by-item-and-customer-ar40103s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales by item and customer (AR40103S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The window toolbar
Button Description
View item Click this to open the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window where you see the details on the item on the invoice selected in the table.
View customer Opens the Customers (AR303000) window so that you can view the customer account of the customer selected in the table.
View document Click this to open the Sales invoices (AR301000) window where you see the details on the invoice document selected in the table.
## The top part
Column Description
From period Select the period starting from which documents will be displayed in the table.
To period Select the period until which documents will be displayed in the table.
Customer The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customers.
Customer class The customer class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all customer classes.
Salesperson The ID and name of the salesperson that was involved in sales for the transactions to be listed. Leave the field blank to view a broader range of results.
Item The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all items.
Item class The item class for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view the sales profitability information for all item classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information.
Include unreleased When this check box is selected, unreleased documents are also displayed in the table.
View details Click this to display the Reference number and Discount (%) columns in the table by default.
Total quantity The total quantity of items on the invoices displayed in the table.
Total amount The total amount of the invoices displayed in the table.
## The table Table columns with the **View details** option selected.
Column Description
Customer The ID of the customer to whom the invoice is created.
Customer name The name of the customer to whom the invoice is created.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Telephone no The default phone number of the customer.
Reference number The reference number of the document.
Type The type of the invoice document.
Item The item ID.
Item description The description of the item charged on the invoice. Click the item ID to see the details on it.
Period The financial period to which the invoice is posted.
Total quantity The total quantity of items on the invoice.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.
Unit price The unit price of the item.
Discount (%) The discount rate used on the invoice.
Discount amount The amount of discount on the invoice.
Total amount The total amount of the invoice.
Last sale date The date when a sale was last made to the customer.
Account The sales account used for the transaction.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Currency The currency in which this price is specified.
Currency unit price The unit price of the item in currency.
Customer class The customer class of the customer.
Description The description of the sales account used for the transaction.
Discount amount (currency) The amount of discount on the invoice in currency.
Item class The item class to which the item belongs.
Released When this check box is selected, the invoice has been released.
Salesperson The ID of the salesperson who has sold the items to the customer.
Salesperson name The name of the salesperson who has sold the items to the customer.
Subaccount The subaccount used on the invoice.
Total amount (currency) The total amount of the invoice in currency.

Related pages

Windows

Sales invoices - overview (AR40104S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-invoices-overview-ar40104s page Use this inquiry to check up the status of invoices and to get an overview of them. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales invoices - overview (AR40104S) Use this inquiry to check up the status of invoices and to get an overview of them. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Element Description
Status

The status of the sales invoices to be viewed.

To view all invoices regardless of their status, select View all (default).

Customer class The customer class for whose customers’ invoices you want to view.
Customer

The customer whose invoices you want to view.

Leave the field blank to view the invoices of all customers.

Currency To view invoices in a certain currency, select a currency here.
Type

The type of invoices you want to view.

If there is no selection, all types of invoices will be displayed.

Show details To quickly see all unpaid documents for the invoices in your view, select the Show details check box, or click the link in the Documents column. The Summary view tab changes to the Details view and you can see all documents and their statuses.
Overdue documents only Select Overdue documents only if you want to list only the documents that are overdue.
Show closed, scheduled, and voided When this check box is selected, you also see closed, scheduled, and voided invoices in the table.
From due date The due date of the invoices to be displayed in the table starts from this date.
From cash discount date The cash discount date of the invoices to be displayed in the table starts from this date.
From period The period to which the invoices to be displayed in the table belong starts from this period.
From document date The document date of the invoices to be displayed in the table starts from this date.
To due date The due date of the invoices to be displayed in the table ends to this date.
To cash discount date The cash discount date of the invoices to be displayed in the table ends to this date.
To period The period to which the invoices to be displayed in the table belong ends to this period.
To document date The document date of the invoices to be displayed in the table ends to this date.
Detail total The amount of the invoice details in total.
VAT taxable total The amount of the invoice that is VAT taxable in total.
VAT exempt total The amount of the invoice that is VAT exempt in total.
VAT total The amount of VAT on the invoice in total.
Balance The balance of the invoice.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the invoice.
Amount The amount of the invoice.
Cash discount The amount of cash discount on the invoice.
## The table Table columns with the **Show details** option selected.
Element Description
Status The status of the invoice.
Type The type of the invoice.
Ref no. The unique ID of the document. You can click the link to view the details of the document in the Sales invoices (AR301000) window.
Customer The number of the customer on the invoice.
Customer name The name of the customer on the invoice.
Currency The currency of the invoice.
Detail total The amount of the invoice details in total.
VAT amount The VAT amount on the invoice.
Total incl. VAT The total amount of the invoice including VAT.
Balance The balance of the invoice.
Overdue amount The overdue amount of the invoice.
Document date The document date of the documents on the invoice.
Due date The due date of the documents on the invoice.
Pay date The pay date of the invoice.
Days overdue The number of days the invoice is overdue.
Days before due The number of days before the invoice will be overdue.
Printed When this check box is selected, the invoice has been printed.
Do not print When this check box is selected, the invoice will not be printed.
Emailed When this check box is selected, the invoice has been emailed.
Do not email When this check box is selected, the invoice will not be emailed.
Send to AutoInvoice When this check box is selected, the invoice will be sent to AutoInvoice.
Sent to AutoInvoice When this check box is selected, the invoice has been sent to AutoInvoice.
Sent date The date when the invoice was sent.
AutoInvoice status The AutoInvoice status of the invoice.
AutoInvoice delivery status The AutoInvoice delivery status of the invoice.
AutoInvoice sent by The sender of the invoice to AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice error message Possible error message from AutoInvoice.
AutoInvoice ID The AutoInvoice ID of the invoice.
Sending method The method to be used to send the invoice to AutoInvoice.
Balance (currency) The balance of the invoice in currency.
Cash discount The amount of cash discount on the invoice.
Cash discount date The cash discount date of the invoice.
Detail total (currency) The amount of the invoice details in total in currency.
E-invoice address The e-invoice address on the invoice.
Overdue amount (currency) The overdue amount of the invoice in currency.
Period The period to which the invoice has been posted.
Rounding diff. The rounding difference on the invoice.
Total incl. VAT (currency) The total amount of the invoice including VAT in currency.
VAT exempt total The amount of the invoice that is VAT exempt in total.
VAT taxable total The amount of VAT on the invoice in total.

Related pages

Windows

Sales order history by item (SO40102S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-history-by-item-so40102s page You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on sales order lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order history by item (SO40102S) You use this inquiry to list all the sales by item, based on sales order lines. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on sales order lines. If you leave all fields empty except for the period, you will get an overview of all items sold in that period. You can group the results by salesperson and owner, and you can also include not completed lines. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the sales order history for. Leave the field blank to include requests for all items.
Item class To view the sales history by class, select an item class. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer To view the sales history by customer, select a customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class To view the sales history by customer class, select a customer class.
Owner The owner is the user to whom the activity is assigned. Select the user for whom you want to view information, or leave the field blank to view information on all owners.
Salesperson The salesperson for whom you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Include not completed lines Select this check box to include lines that are not marked as Completed.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
Group by owner Groups the lines of the table per owner.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
## The table
Column Description
Owner The username of the user to whom the sales activity is assigned.
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Open qty The quantity of the item that was not shipped.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

Sales shipment history by item (SO40103S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-shipment-history-by-item-so40103s page You use this inquiry to list all sales by item, based on shipment lines. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales shipment history by item (SO40103S) You use this inquiry to list all sales by item, based on shipment lines. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. > [!NOTE] > This inquiry is based on shipment lines. ## The top part
Element Description
Item ID Select the item you want to view the shipment history for.
Item class The item class of the items to be included in the report. Leave the field blank to include requests for items of multiple classes.
Subaccount The subaccount for which you want to view information for the item.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services.
Customer class The class of the customers to be included in the report.
Salesperson The salesperson for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
Group by salesperson Groups the lines of the table per salesperson.
Include not confirmed lines If you select this check box, all shipment statuses will be included in this inquiry. It will also show lines for items where the ordered quantity is partly delivered.
From period The first financial period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
To period The last period for the date range the inquiry will cover.
Start date The starting date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
End date The ending date in the date range for which you want to display the history of sales.
## The table
Column Description
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the sale.
Item ID The sold stock or non-stock item, by its item ID.
Item description The description provided for the item.
Quantity The total ordered quantity of the item.
Cost of goods sold The accumulated COGS balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Sales The accumulated sales balance from the sales order lines for the item.
Profit The profit for the sold item (calculated: Sales - COGS).
Margin The margin for the sold item (calculated: profit as percentage of Sales).

Related pages

Windows

Sales orders (SO301000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000 section You can use this window to create new sales and transfer orders with the order types defined in the system, as well as to view and edit the details of existing sales and transfer orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales orders (SO301000) You can use this window to create new sales and transfer orders with the order types defined in the system, as well as to view and edit the details of existing sales and transfer orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can cancel an order, and you can create a shipment or prepare an invoice for an existing order. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Create a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order/) + [Create a sales order with allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-allocations/) + [Create a sales order with reserved allocations](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-with-reserved-allocations/) + [Change customer or customer location on sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-customer-or-customer-location-on-sales-order/) + [Create a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/create-a-transfer-order/) + [Process a transfer order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-transfer-orders/process-a-transfer-order/) + [Process authorised returns (RM)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-authorised-returns-rm/) + [Process cash returns (CR)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-cash-returns-cr/) + [Process returns for credit (RC)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-for-credit-rc/) + [Process returns with replacement (RR)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/process-returns-with-replacement-rr/) + [Create multiple shipments for the same sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order/) + [Add notes to sales order printouts](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/add-notes-to-sales-order-printouts/) + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) + [Update a column for all order lines](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines/) + [Reverse an invoice with excise duty](/visma-net-erp/help/excise-duty/reverse-an-invoice-with-excise-duty/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions
  • Create shipment To create a shipment for the sales order. When you invoke this action, the Specify shipment parameters dialog box opens.

    Note

    For a sales order line that has an open shipment, you cannot create a new shipment until the open shipment is confirmed.

  • Create receipt To create a receipt for an order involving an authorised customer return; you invoke this action when the goods are actually received. The Specify shipment parameters dialog box opens where you can select for which warehouse you want to create the receipt. You can repeat this for all warehouses.

  • Open order To change the status of the document to Open from Back order (after the goods that were back ordered have been received).

  • Reopen order To change the Cancelled status of the order to Open if you need to correct or delete the shipments created for the order.

  • Copy order To copy the order to a new order. When you invoke this action, the Copy to dialog box opens. In the dialog box, you can select whether to recalculate prices and discounts and whether to cancel manual discounts.

    Note

    The allocations performed for any line of the original order are not copied, even for orders that require allocations.

    Note

    If you choose to copy the order by using the Copy/paste menu on the toolbar, while prices and discounts a recopied from the original order (without automatic updating and without recalculation of discounts), allocations are again not copied to a new order.

Send by email
To initiate the process of sending the sales order as an email.
Release from credit hold
To change the status of the document from Credit hold to Open if the customer passes the credit check.
Prepare invoice
To prepare an invoice for the order.
Create purchase order
To create a purchase order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order.
Cancel order
To cancel the order regardless of its status. If you cancel an order for which there are confirmed shipments, you need to reopen the order to delete the shipments.
Create transfer order
You can create a transfer order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order. When you click this action, the system redirects you to the Create transfer orders (SO509000) window.
Place on back order
To change the status of this sales order to Back order.
Recalculate prices
To open the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.
Reports Provides navigation to the Sales order (SO64111S) report report, which you can use to print the sales order or quote for sending it to the customer.
Try out the new version

Opens the current order in the new Sales orders (SO30100S) window.

Note

This button is only available for orders with the order type SO, CS, IN or QT.

### The Specify shipment parameters dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the parameters of a new shipment that will be created for the order.
Column Description
Shipment date The date of the new shipment. By default, it is the current business date.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item will be shipped.
### The Copy to dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used to copy the selected order to a new one. The allocations performed for any line of the original order are not copied.
Column Description
Order type The type of the new order, which will be a copy of the selected order.
Order no. The system will assign a new order number to the copy of the selected order.
Recalculate unit prices Select this check box if you want the system to replace the item prices with the current prices, in the copy of the selected order.
Recalculate discounts Select this check box if you want the system to recalculate the discounts for the copy of the selected order.
Override manual discounts Select this check box if you want the system to cancel the manual discounts for the copy of the order, and search for applicable automatic discounts.
### The Recalculate prices dialog box You use this dialog box to specify the options to be used for updating prices and discounts for the sales order.
Column Description
Recalculate

The way prices and discounts are recalculated. You can select one of the following options:

Current line
To recalculate prices and discounts for the selected line
All lines
To recalculate prices and discounts for all lines
Set current unit prices Select this check box if you want the system to replace the item prices with the current prices, in the selected line or all lines.
Override manual prices

Select this check box if you want the system to replace the item prices that have been modified manually (in the Unit price or Manual amount column), with the current prices.

The check box is available for selection if the Set current unit prices check box is selected. Once the manual prices are overridden in the document, the system clears the Manual price check boxes in the appropriate document lines.

Recalculate discounts Select this check box if you want the system to recalculate the discounts for the selected line or all lines.
Override manual line discounts Select this check box if you want the system to cancel the manual discounts for the selected line or all lines (depending on the option selected in the Recalculate field), and search for the applicable automatic discounts.
## The top part
Element Description
Order type

Select one of the predefined order types or a custom order type created in the Order types (SO201000) window.

If an order type does not appear in the list of options, make sure the Active check box is selected for it in the Order types (SO201000) window.

For details on each type, see About predefined types of sales orders. The predefined order types include the following:

Credit note (CM)
A document created when goods rejected by the customer are returned.
Cash return (CR)
A document used to record returns for cash sales.
Cash sale (CS)
A document created to account for a cash sale that doesn’t require shipping.
Invoice (IN)
A document used to invoice the customer for the shipped goods.
Quote (QT)
An agreement to sell specific goods with a specified price to the customer in the future.
Return for credit (RC)
A document created to authorise a customer return for credit in the amount of the returned goods only.
Generic authorised return (RM)
A document created to authorise a customer return of another type, such as a return with replacement by another item, or a return that may require additional charges.
Return with replacement (RR)
A document created to authorise a customer return for an exact replacement.
Sales order with allocation (SA)
(This option is only available if the Sales order to purchase order link functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) A customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date; this request requires the reservation of the requested quantities of the items. Once you save an order of this type, the quantities of items are added to the Sales orders allocated plan types.
Note
Sales order (SO)
A customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date.
Transfer (TR)
This option is only available if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window. A document used to account for transferring goods from one warehouse to another for replenishment.
Order no. The order number of the document. For new documents, the system automatically generates this number by using the number series assigned to documents of the type.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following options:

  • On hold: Indicates that the order is on hold, which means that additions and changes can be made and order quantities do not affect the item availability. Deselect the Hold check box to initiate the following operations:

    1. A credit check for the customer (if it is required for this customer)
    2. The assignment for approval (if approval is configured in your system)
    3. The assignment of the Open status to the order if the credit check was successful and if the order was approved automatically
  • Credit hold: This status is only available for orders of the QT, SO, SA, IN, and CM order types. Indicates that the customer has failed the credit check, which the system performed when the order was taken off hold or saved with the On hold check box deselected. An order with this status can be saved with only the Credit hold or On hold status if the Hold document on failed credit check check box is selected for the order type in the Order types (SO201000) window. Once you have received payments from the customer, you can apply the Release from credit hold action.

Note

To subject the orders (of the SO, SA, TR, and QT types) that have been taken off credit hold to approval, add appropriate conditions (checking if the Credit hold check box is selected in the Sales orders window) to the approval map. Otherwise, the order will get the Open status.

  • Open: Indicates (if applicable) that the sales order is not on hold anymore, the customer has passed the credit check, the order has been approved (if approval is required), and shipment has not yet occurred. If approval of sales orders of this type is required in your organisation, open orders cannot be edited.

For a particular open order, you can create a shipment by clicking the Create shipment action, or you can create multiple shipments for multiple open orders by using the Process orders (SO501000) window. When you create shipments for multiple orders, the system checks the availability of each item; if a shipment cannot be created according to the shipping rules (for details, see: About shipping rules), the system assigns the Back order status to the order.

  • Cancelled: Indicates that the order has been cancelled. You can cancel an order if it has one of the following statuses: On hold, Credit hold, Pending approval, Rejected, Back order, or Open. To cancel an order with the Completed status, you need to reopen the order to delete the shipments and then cancel the order. You can not cancel an order that has the Shipping status.
  • Shipping: (This status is not available for some return orders and orders of the CS and IN order types.) Indicates that the order is being shipped. If a shipment can be created according to the shipping rules, the order’s status changes to Shipping. Each confirmed shipment updates the data on the order showing how many items are being shipped ( Qty. on shipments ) and how many items are still to be shipped ( Open qty. ).
  • Back order: (This status is only available for sales orders of the SO and SA types.) Indicates that the order cannot be shipped because the specified items are not available. You can assign this status to an open order manually if when you attempt to create a shipment, the system detects that the order cannot be shipped in full and displays a message about this. This status can be assigned to orders automatically when you run the Create shipments process by using the Process orders (SO501000) window if the shipping rules specified on the document level and on the line level do not allow shipment creation. If the Replan back orders check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window, on release of the appropriate inventory receipts, the requested quantities of items are re-planned (booked) for back orders, so that you can create shipments for these back orders by running the Create shipment process in the Process orders (SO501000) window.
  • Invoiced: Means that the invoices for the order have been generated. This status is available only for orders of types that involve updating customer ledger; it is not used for transfer ( TR ), quote ( QT ), and return for replacement ( RR ) orders.
  • Completed: Indicates that all related inventory documents required for the order type have been generated and released. Completed orders of the QT order type can be opened again.
Note

For details on statuses, see: About sales order processing options.

Hold

A check box that you select if the document is on hold and should not be processed further at this time.

Deselect the check box to perform an automatic credit check for the customer (if configured) and then, if approval of sales orders is configured in your system, to assign the order for approval.

Date The date of the document.
Requested on The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; this date provides the default values for the Requested on dates for order lines. The default value is the current business date.
Customer order

(This field does not appear for orders of the TR type.)

The reference number of the original customer document that the sales order is based on.

External ref. The reference number of the sales order in a third-party application if Visma Net is integrated with such an application and imports the sales orders from it.
Customer

The customer that has ordered the goods or services.

If the TR order type is selected, Customer is read-only and displays your company ID and business name.

Location

(This field only appears if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services have been ordered. If the Transfer order type has been selected, use this box to select the company location related to the transfer.

Contact The contact person of the customer.
Currency

(This field appears for all order types except the Transfer order type, if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The currency of the document.

To the right of the currency you have the exchange rate. Clicking the Exchange rate drop-down list, will open the Rate selection dialog box, where you can view and change the details of the exchange rate.

For the documents with amounts in foreign currency, the Currency toggle button switches the currency of the amounts between the base currency and the selected foreign currency. The label on the Currency toggle button depends on the currently selected currency of the amount:

View base: The amount is displayed in the foreign currency; click the button to view the amount in the base currency.

View currency: The amount is displayed in the base currency; click the button to view the amount in the foreign currency.

The Currency toggle button does not affect the documents with amounts in the base currency only.

Note

You can only change the customer’s default currency and rate when the Enable currency override and Enable rate override check boxes are selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Destination warehouse

(This field only appears if the TR order type is selected.)

The warehouse to which the goods should be transferred.

Credit hold

(This check box does not appear if the TR order type is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that this customer order is on credit hold. This happens if the customer does not comply with the credit verification rules and if the Check credit on entry option is selected for orders of this type in the Order types (SO201000) window. However, if you need to create a new sales order for this customer as an exception and you, based on a user role, have access to the Credit hold check box, you can clear the Credit hold check box, save the order, and release the order. The initial amount of the order serves as this document’s credit limit, and if a user increases the amount, the system does not allow the order to be removed from credit hold in this way.

Project

(This field is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to customer invoices.
Print line note on internal sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to order confirmations.
Description A brief description of the document.
Ordered qty. The sum of the quantity for all lines, with the exception of lines with line type Misc. charge.
VAT exempt total

(This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.

VAT taxable total

(This field is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The document total that is subject to VAT. The VAT taxable amount is only displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window. If the check box is cleared, this field is empty.

Note

If the document contains multiple transactions with different taxes applied and each of the applied taxes has this check box selected, the taxable amount calculated for each line of the document is added to the VAT taxable total field of the document.

VAT total The total amount of tax paid on the document.
Order total

The total amount of the document, which is calculated as follows:

Line total + Misc. total + Freight + Premium freight

– Discount total + VAT total + Excise duty total

Discount total The total amount of discount on the sales order.
Total line discount The total amount of line discounts on the order.
Total profit The total profit calculated from the lines of the order. This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Margin total The total margin calculated from the lines of the order. This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Mark-up total The total mark-up on the order. This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Total cost

The total of the extended costs on the lines of the sales order. If the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box is selected, the Total cost is the total of replacement costs on the lines of the sales order.

This information is displayed if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.

ROT or RUT deductible document Select this check box if the amount on this document is applicable for ROT or RUT deduction. The ROT and RUT details tab will appear and the columns RUT or ROT deductible, Item type, Type of work and Deductible amount will be displayed in the Document details tab table.
Use replacement cost for margin/profit When this option is selected, the line level profit and margin values are calculated based on the line’s Supplier price or the line item’s last cost, instead of the Unit cost.
Excise duty total The total of the amounts in the Excise duty amount column in the Document details tab.
## The Document details tab This tab has a table that lists all the items included in the sales order. The line numbers are assigned automatically and are changed automatically when you reorder the lines. Information on the applied manual discounts and the **Line** -level discounts (if any are configured in your system) is shown on the tab. > [!NOTE] > When you are creating a new order, you can enter the data manually or import the order details from a file in.xlsx or.csv format. When you select a line, more information about the availability for the line item is displayed in the table footer. See the table footer description below for more information.
Button Description
Allocations

(This button is only available if at least one of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Sales order to purchase order link, Multiple warehouse locations, and Lot and serial tracking.)

Opens the Allocations dialog box so that you can allocate the stock for the order and specify warehouse locations and lot or serial numbers of the items, if required for the order by order type settings.

For more details, see: the Order types (SO201000) window.

Add sales invoice

(This button is enabled for only return orders).

Opens the Add invoice details dialog box so that you can add a line or multiple lines from the selected invoice to this return order.

Add item Opens the Item lookup dialog box, which shows the item availability at various warehouses and lets you add items to the sales order.
Purchase order link

(This button is only available for lines that have the Mark for purchase order check box selected.)

Opens the Purchasing details dialog box, which you use to link the sales order to an existing purchase order that has the required item listed.

Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up to display availability information about the selected stock item.
Assemble

A button that opens the Kit assembly dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

Kit specification

A button that opens the Kit specifications dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications (IN209500) window is available both for stock and non-stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

View kit assembly Click this button to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
### The table
Column Description
Branch The branch that sells the item. This column only appears if you have multiple branches.
Invoice no.

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

A column that holds the reference number of the original invoice (which lists the goods that were ordered and later returned by the customer).

Operation

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

The operation to be performed in the Inventory workspace to fulfill the order. An order of the RR or RM type includes lines with theReceipt operation and lines with the Issue operation. Orders of other return types include only lines with the Receipt operation.

Note

When you create an order of the RM type, you cannot save the order with the Open status until its balance is negative. Make sure the Hold check box is selected until you have added all the replacement and refund lines.

Note

For more details on return orders, see: Process returns.

Item ID The stock or non-stock item to be sold or returned, by its item ID.
Create issue automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that for each order line of the Receipt type in RR and RM orders, a line of the Issue type will be created automatically after the Receipt lines have been processed.
Free item

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the stock item specified in the row is a free item. You can add a free item manually, or it can be added automatically as a result of application of a group-level discount configured in the Discounts (AR209500) window.

If you select this check box for the item, the system updates the Unit price, Discount percent, Discount amount, and Manual amount amounts with 0 and selects the Manual discount check box.

Warehouse

The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item should be delivered.

This column only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Kit assembly

A link that opens the Kit assembly (IN307000) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

Kit specifications

A link that opens the Kit specifications (IN209500) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications dialog box is available both for stock and non-stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

View kit assembly Click this link to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.
Quantity The quantity of the item sold, measured in the UoM.
Qty. on shipments A read-only column that displays the quantity of the stock item being prepared for shipment and already shipped for this order.
Open qty. The quantity of the item to be shipped; that is, the total quantity minus the quantity shipped according to closed shipment documents.
Unit cost

The cost for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item. For information about how the unit cost is calculated, see About item costs and valuation methods.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

Unit price The price for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item. If you had entered the unit price manually and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. If you want to replace this price with the sales price currently available for the item, use the Recalculate prices action.
Manual price

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the unit price in this line has been corrected or specified manually. If you clear this check box, the system updates the unit price in the document line with the current price (if one is specified).

If you change the customer number in the sales order or return order, the system does not update unit prices in the lines for which this check box is selected.

Note

For more information on changing the customer number in a sales order, see: About sales order processing options.

Discount code (The column is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window, and it is not available for orders of the Transfer type.) The code of the discount that has been applied to this line.
Discount series (The column is hidden by default and is only available if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The ID of the discount sequence that has been applied to this line.
Discount percent

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item (if the item is not a free item).

A selected Manual discount check box indicates that the percent of the discount is specified by the line discount that has been applied manually, or has been entered manually or calculated based on the discount amount entered manually for this line item.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the percent manually and the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item (if the item is not a free item).

The selected Manual discount check box indicates that the amount of the discount is based on the line discount that has been applied manually, or has been specified manually or calculated based on the discount percent entered manually for this line item.

If the Manual discount check box is selected, you can enter the amount manually and the discount percent will be calculated automatically.

Manual discount

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount has been applied manually. With this check box selected, you can enter either the discount percent or the discount amount, or you can select the discount code of one of the discounts intended for manual application. If you select the Free item check box for the line item, the Manual discount check box is selected automatically.

Note

If you change the customer number in the sales order or return order, the system does not update the line-level discounts in the lines for which this check box is selected. For more information on changing the customer number in a sales order, see: About sales order processing options.

Disc. unit price The unit price, which has been recalculated after the application of discounts.
Average cost

The total cost of the item in the warehouse, divided by the total quantity of the item in the warehouse.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

Manual amount

The unit price multiplied by the quantity, deducted with the line discount.

If you had entered the manual amount once and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. If you want the manual amount to be recalculated automatically based on the applicable sales price, use the Recalculate prices action. If the Free item check box is selected for this stock item, the manual amount is set to 0.

Term start date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should start for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

Term end date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

Excise duty amount The total excise duty amount for the line. The Date in the top part of the window determines which duty rate is used (from the Duty rates (EF207000) window).
Amount not yet invoiced (This column is not available for orders of the Transfer type.) The amount not yet invoiced for the line, calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order. The line’s excise duty amount is not included.
Requested on The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; the default value is specified in the Requested on field in the top part. These dates can be different for different lines if the order-level shipping rule is Back orders allowed. For information on shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.
Ship on

The date when the item should be shipped. By default, this date is calculated as a date that is earlier than the Requested on date (for this line) by the number of lead days but not earlier than the current business date. You can modify the date only if the order-level shipping rule is set to the Back orders allowed option on the Delivery settings tab.

Note

If you change the Requested on date for the order, the system prompts you to choose whether you want to keep the dates specified for each line or to update the respective dates with the new Requested on date.

In the Process orders (SO501000) window, you can select the orders for creating shipments by the Ship on dates specified in their lines if you select the By ship date option in the Select by field and specify the range for scheduled shipment dates in the Start date and End date fields.

Shipping rule

The way the line item should be shipped. Select one of the following options:

Back orders allowed
The ordered quantity can be delivered in multiple shipments. If the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped, and the remaining quantity (open quantity) can be shipped later. The line is not completed until it has a non-zero open quantity. The order gets the Back order status.
Cancel remainder
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment, but if the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.
Ship only when complete
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment. If the ordered quantity is not available for shipping, the order with this line gets the Back order status.
Note

For more information, see: About shipping rules.

Undership threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) to consider the order shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Overship threshold (%) The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Completed A check box that can be selected to indicate to the system that this line is completed.
Mark for purchase order

A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order line was marked for purchasing (if it has not been shipped completely). If you select this check box, the line will be visible in the Purchases workspace and available for adding to a purchase order.

The Mark for purchase order check box can be selected if the line item is a stock item or non-stock item that has both the Require shipment and Require receipt check boxes selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

Supplier price

This field is populated with the first available value in the following order of priority:

  1. The default supplier’s price for the item set in the Supplier prices (AP202000) window, the Price column.
  2. The default supplier’s Last supplier price, collected from the Stock items (IN202500) window, the Supplier details tab.

You can override the default supplier for the line item by changing the Supplier column for the line.

You can set the Supplier price manually if the Override supplier price check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window, the General information tab.

Purchase order source

The type of purchase order to be used to fulfill this line, which can be one of the following options:

See also:

Lot/serial no. (This column only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is only available for orders of the RR type.) The lot or serial number of the item for returns.
Expiration date The expiration date for the item with the specified lot number. The column only appears for orders of the RR type.
Reason code

The reason code to be used for creation or cancellation of the order, if applicable. A reason code is required on creation of orders of the CR predefined order type.

Only reason codes with the Sales or Issue usage can be selected.

Salesperson ID (This column only appears if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is not available for orders of the TR type.) The salesperson associated with the sale of the line item.
VAT category (This column is not available for orders of the TR type.) The VAT category ID that applies to the line item. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Commissionable (This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is not available for orders of the TR type.) A check box that indicates that this line is subjected to sales commission. The details of commissions are shown on the Commissions tab.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID for the item, such as the item ID used by the customer.
Line description The description provided for the stock item.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Combine sales sub. from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column.
Project task (This column is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The particular task of the project with which this document is associated.
Extended cost

The extended cost of the item, which is the unit cost multiplied by the quantity. You can manually enter an amount that is not based on the unit cost.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

External link In this column, you can write a reference for the line to any other document or system.
Account The income account to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Use sales account from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Order type The type of sales order in which this line item is listed.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order in which this line item is listed.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
Line type

The line type for the sales order line, which can be one of the following options:

Misc. charge
for non-stock items that do not require shipment.
Goods for warehouse
for stock items.
Non-stock goods:
for non-stock items that require shipment.
Line no. The original order number of the document line. This number is not updated after reordering lines.
Base order qty The quantity of the item sold, expressed in the base unit of measure. This quantity is used for calculating discounts if The base UOM option is selected in the Apply quantity discounts to field on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
ROT or RUT deductible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line item is ROT or RUT deductible, according to its settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window. This only applies to non-stock items.
Item type

The Item type applies to a ROT or RUT deductible document. You can edit this column. The type of the item, as selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, the ROT and RUT settings (Sweden) section, the Type field. For a stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

For a non-stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

When there is no Type selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, Other cost is the default type.

Type of work The type of work the line item is related to, according to the item’s settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) window. You can edit this column.
Deductible amount Read-only column. The amount your client can deduct for the line item, if the item is ROT or RUT deductible.
Supplier The supplier that will supply the item, by its ID.
Supplier name The name of the supplier that will supply the item.
Supplier currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier, by its ID.
Supplier UoM The item’s unit of measure used by the supplier.
### The table footer When you select a line, more information about the line item is displayed in the table footer.
Element Description
On hand The quantity of the stock item currently on hand at the warehouse.
available for assembly (This element only appears when you select a line with a stock kit.) The quantity of kits that can be assembled based on component availability.
available The quantity available of the item at the specified warehouse, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class. When you select a line with a non-stock kit, the quantity of this non-stock kit on open and on hold sales orders is displayed in round brackets.
available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected warehouse.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

allocated The quantity of the item that is reserved in any of the available warehouses.
Profit

The profit on the line.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

Margin

The margin on the line.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

Mark-up

The markup on the line.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

Replacement cost for the unit or Expected unit cost

The cost or expected cost to replace the item.

When the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box in the top part is selected, the Replacement cost for the unit is collected from the Supplier price column in the table. If Supplier price is not set, the Replacement cost for the unit is set as the item’s Last cost, collected from the Stock items (IN202500) window, the Price/cost information tab, the Cost statistics section.

When the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box in the top part is not selected, the Expected unit cost is collected from the Unit cost column in the table.

(This element only appears if the Show gross margin/profit check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

### The Add sales invoice details dialog box (This dialog box is only available for the following document types: **credit notes (CM)**, **generic authorised returns** ( **RM)**, **returns for credit (RC)**, or **returns with replacements (RR)**.) You use this dialog box to add lines from an existing document of the selected type to this return order. The dialog box provides a top part and a table. The selected lines of the documents are added to the return order without changes: The system makes no price or discount updates, and no updates due to exchange rate fluctuations.
Element Description
Type The type of documents available for selection in the dialog box, which can be one of the following: Invoice, Cash sale, or Debit note.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document whose lines you want to add to the return order.
Show non-stock kits by component

A check box that you select for the table to display the stock item components of non-stock kits if there are any in the selected document.

If this check box is cleared, non-stock kits are displayed as is.

Column Description
Item ID The item ID of the stock item or kit specified in the document line.
Warehouse The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item was sold.
Location The warehouse location from which the specified quantity of the item was sold.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item.
Quantity

The quantity of the item specified in the document line. For a component of a non-stock kit, this column shows the total quantity, which is the quantity of the non-stock kit specified in the document line multiplied by the quantity of this component assembled in the non-stock kit.

Suppose that in the system there is a non-stock kit, NSKIT1, that includes 5 NSKITITEM1 stock items, and you have processed a sale of 2 NSKIT1 kits.

If you select the Show non-stock kits by components check box, the table will show the document line with the NSKITITEM1 ID and a quantity of 10.

Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number assigned to the specified quantity of the item.
Line description The description provided for the line in the original document.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Item lookup dialog box In this dialog box, you select the items to be added to the sales order and specify their quantities. By using this dialog box, you can find an item by a string in the item's item ID, alternative item ID, or description, and view the item availability information for various warehouses. You can specify the quantities to be delivered from different warehouses to which your user account has access.
Element Description
Item The item ID of an item, or a string in the item ID, alternative item ID, or description to be searched for.
Barcode The barcode of the item.
Warehouse

(This field only appears if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.)

The warehouse where the items are stocked. Leave the field blank to view information about all warehouses to which you have access.

Item class ID The item class of the item.
Show available items only A check box that indicates (if selected) that only items whose available quantities are greater than 0 will be listed.
All items A button that indicates (if selected) that all items will be searched by using the specified criteria.
Sales after

A button that indicates (if selected) that only items sold to this customer since the particular date (which you specify in the adjacent Sales after field, which appears as soon as you click the button) are searched.

The date that appears by default in the Sales after field is the date three months earlier than the current business date.

Column Description
Qty. selected The quantity of sales units of the item (under the specified item ID) that you want to add to the order.
Item ID The item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item with the specified item ID and subitem code.
Sales unit The unit of measure used as a sales unit for the item.
Qty. available Calculated as On hand quantity plus quantity in unreleased purchase orders minus the quantity in unreleased sales orders. Note that you can configure the way availability data is calculated in accordance with your company’s policies. You specify calculation options for each item class in the Item classes (IN201000) window.
Qty. on hand The quantity on hand of this item at the specified warehouse.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID for the item, such as the item ID used by the customer or any supplier.
Alt. item ID type The type of alternative codification used for the item if applicable; it can be one of the following options: Customer part number, Supplier part number, Global, or Barcode.
Alternate description The description provided for the alternative item ID.
Warehouse

(This column only appears if the Warehouses functionality is enabled in your system.)

The warehouse where the items are stocked.

Qty. last sales

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The quantity of the item last sold to the customer.

Currency

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The currency of the price.

Last unit price

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The price used for the last sale.

Last sales date

(This column is hidden by default; it appears and is populated if the Sales efter check box is selected.)

The date of the last sale.

Item class ID The item class of the item.
Item class description The description provided for the item class.
Price class ID The price class of the item.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Purchasing details dialog box (This dialog box is only available if the order line has a **Mark for purchase order** check box selected.) You use this dialog box to link the line of the sales order that has been marked for purchasing to one or more purchase orders. The dialog box provides a top part and a table.
Element Description
Purchase order source

The source to be used to fulfill this line, which can be one of the following options: Purchase to order or Drop ship.

( Drop ship only appears if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

Supplier The supplier from which the goods have been ordered. Select a particular supplier, or leave the field blank to view orders for different supplier.
Purchase warehouse

(This field only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The destination warehouse for the items to be purchased.

Columns Description
Purchase type The type of purchase order.
Purchase order no. The reference number of the purchase order, which is a link to the purchase order.
Supplier ref. The reference number used by the supplier.
Line type The line type of the purchase order, which can be one of the following options: Goods for warehouse or Goods for sales order.
Item ID The item by its item ID.
Supplier The supplier that will supply the item, by its ID.
Supplier name The name of the supplier that will supply the item.
Promised The date when the items should be shipped, according to the purchase order.
UoM The unit of measure used for purchases.
Order qty. The quantity of items ordered.
Available quantity The quantity of the item that has not been linked to any sales order and is available for the sales order.
Open qty. The quantity of items that were not shipped.
Line description The description provided for the line in the purchase order.
Button Description
Save Adds the selected lines to the order and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Cancels the changes and closes the dialog box.
### The Inventory summary dialog box Here you can view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses. For more information about this window, see [Inventory summary (IN401000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/inventory-summary-in401000/). ## The VAT details tab This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type. The columns in this tab, which the system fills out automatically when you click ![icon-save](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-save.png), contain information on all individual taxes applied to the document lines. The VAT listed on the tab are those that are included in both the VAT categories of line items and the VAT zone of the customer shipping location.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT.
## The Commissions tab On the **Commissions** tab of the window, you can view the commissions calculated for this sales order. This tab only appears if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window. The tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.
Element Description
Default salesperson The ID of a salesperson to be used by default for each sales order line.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The salesperson who participated in sales.
Commission (%) The percentage of commission generally earned by the salesperson.
Commission amt. The commission amount earned by the salesperson on this document.
Commissionable amount The amount used to calculate the commission.
## The Financial settings tab This tab holds the customer's invoice information for the sales order. ### The Invoice information section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to override the default contact information.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Override address A check box that you select to override the default address information.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Financial information section
Element Description
Branch The branch with which this order is associated.
Override VAT zone This check box indicates (if selected) that the selected customer’s VAT zone will not be overridden if a ship via code is changed for the order.
Customer VAT zone

(This field is not available for transfer orders.) The VAT zone to be used to process customer sales orders, which generally is the zone associated with the customer’s delivery address.

By default, the customer VAT zone is set to the VAT zone of the customer location specified for the order; if a VAT zone is not specified and the order is to be shipped via a common carrier, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone determined by the postcode of the delivery address; if the order is not to be shipped by a common carrier, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.

If the sales order was created from a quote that has a VAT zone specified, this VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone specified for this quote.

You can override the default VAT zone; to keep the selected VAT zone, select the Override VAT zone check box.

Invoice separately (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document should be invoiced separately (that is, it requires a separate invoice).
Invoice no. (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The reference number of the invoice generated for this order. This field is only available for orders of the Invoice (IN) type if the Invoice separately check box is selected in the Order types (SO201000) window for the order type. You can enter a reference number for the invoice (before you click Prepare invoice in the Actions menu on the toolbar) if the numbering sequence assigned to invoices in the Order types (SO201000) window is configured for manual numbering.
Invoice date (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The date of the invoice generated for the order. You can enter the date manually if the Invoice separately check box is selected for the order type in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Terms (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Due date (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The due date of the invoice according to the payment terms.
Cash discount date (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The date when the cash discount is available for the invoice based on the payment terms.
Post period The period to post the transactions generated by the invoice.
Work group The work group responsible for the sales order.
Owner The user in the work group who is responsible for the sales order.
Orig. order type The type of the original order; this field is available only for returns.
Orig. order no. The reference number of the original sales order (for returns).
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order was emailed.
### The References section
Element Description
Accounting cost ref. A textual value that specifies where to book the relevant data into the Buyer’s financial accounts.
Originator document ref. The identification of the call for tender or lot the invoice relates to.
Contract document ref. The identification of a contract.
Customer project The project number requested by the customer. When a project number is entered in this field, it will replace the internal project number when sending to AutoInvoice for VismaXML and PEPPOL BIS. When nothing is filled in, the internal project number will be sent to AutoInvoice.
## The Payment settings tab This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.
Element Description
Payment method The payment method to be used to pay for the sales order. By default, it is the customer’s default payment method, but you can select another method for the order.
Description The description of the payment method.
Cash account The cash account associated with the customer payment method. The field is filled in automatically with the cash account specified as the default for the selected method.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Processing status Read only. This field shows the processing status of the card transaction returned by a processing centre after a user has initiated authorisation, capture, or void.
PC response reason Read only. This field shows the processing details of the card transaction returned by a processing centre after a user has initiated authorisation, capture, or void.
Pre-auth.no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the authorisation transaction returned by a processing centre after a user has initiated authorisation.
Authentication expires on Read only. This field shows the date when the transaction authorisation expires.
Pre-authorised amount Read only. This field shows the amount that has been authorised.
Payment total Read only. This field shows the payment total amount.
Unpaid balance Read only. This field shows the amount that has not been paid if the sales order was paid partially.
Register transaction no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the transaction that captured the specified amount.
Orig. PC ref. no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the transaction in the processing centre.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains delivery information, including the customer's ship-to address, shipping terms, and zone. Also, you can specify the boxes to be used for the order. ### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to override the default contact information.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Override address A check box that you select if this is not the default address of the customer.
Address 1 The first line of the delivery address.
Address 2 The second line of the delivery address.
Address 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set by using the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Delivery information section
Element Description
Sched. shipment The date when the ordered goods are scheduled to be shipped. By default, it is the date that is specified in the Requested on field minus the number of lead days, but it is not earlier than the current business date. You can set this date manually.
Ship separately This check box indicates (if selected) that the goods for the customer should be shipped separately for each sales order.
Shipping rule

An option that controls whether incomplete and partial shipments for the order are allowed. Select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
This option indicates that the required quantity should be delivered in one shipment. Nothing will be shipped until the complete quantity is in stock.
Back orders allowed
This option indicates that the required quantity can be delivered in more than one shipment, with the remainder back-ordered.
Cancel remainder
This option indicates that the required items should be delivered in one shipment, but if the requested quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.

For more information on processing sales orders with different shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.

Cancel by The date when the order should be cancelled if the Back orders allowed option has been selected in the Shipping rule field. The suggested date in this field is generated based on the value in the Days to keep field on the General settings tab in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Cancelled A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order has been cancelled on the date specified in Cancel by.
Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse from which the goods should be shipped; the warehouse specified here appears as the default ship-from warehouse in the Shop for rates dialog box for all the packages.
Ship via

The ship via code that represents the carrier and its service to be used for shipping the ordered goods. For this ship via code, ifManual is specified as the freight calculation method ,the freight cost must be specified in the Freight cost field on the Totals tab (in this window).

Note

Changing the Ship via code for an open sales order may update the customer VAT zone specified in the Customer VAT zone field on the Financial settings tab. To prevent the selected customer VAT zone from being overridden if the ship via code is changed, select the Override VAT zone check box on the Financial settings tab.

Packages (button) Opens the Shop for rates dialog box, so you can manually select the boxes for the order or view the automatically suggested packages if the Automatic packaging functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.
FOB point The point where ownership of the goods is transferred to the customer.
Priority (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can only be used for informational purposes.) The level of priority for processing orders of this customer, as specified for the customer on the Delivery settings tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used for this customer.
Shipping zone The shipping goods of the customer.
Residential delivery A check box that you select to indicate that the shipment should be delivered to a residential area.
Saturday delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order may be delivered on Saturday.
Insurance A check box that you select to indicate that insurance is required for this order.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Transaction type

A pick list where you select the transaction type to be used for Intrastat reporting.

You can also set a default transaction type for each order type. This is done in the Order types (SO201000) window.

### The Shop for rates dialog box By using this dialog box (which appears when you click the **Packages** button), you can manually select the boxes and specify their gross weight. If the **Automatic packaging** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window, the system automatically calculates the optimal set of packages for each order or shipment, and you can view and adjust them, if needed. > [!NOTE] > The particular packages defined with the help of the **Shop for rates** dialog box will be used for shipment only if you select the **Manual packaging** check box in this dialog box; if you do not, the system may recalculate the packages when it creates a consolidated shipment or the order is changed.
Element Description
Order weight The total weight of the order in the base UoM—that is, the weight of the items specified in the sales order. About units of weight and volume.
Package weight The gross weight of the order in the base UoM, which includes the order weight and the weights of the boxes selected for order packaging. weight calculation, see: About units of weight and volume.
Manual packaging This check box indicates (if selected) that the packages selected for the order in this dialog box will be used for shipping. You can select this check box and then select the boxes for the order manually in the Packages table, or you can review the suggested packages and then select the Manual packaging check box. If you select this check box, the packages will not be automatically recalculated to further optimise the cost even if the order is included in a consolidated shipment.
#### The Packages table This table includes the list of boxes used for this order. If the items should be packed manually, you can select the boxes for packages and specify the weight of each package.
Button Description
Refresh packages Recalculates packages for the carrier selected in the Packages table.
Column Description
Box ID The box used for the package.
Description The description provided for the box.
Ship from warehouse The warehouse from which the current package should be shipped. By default, it is the warehouse selected as the Preferred warehouse ID on the Delivery settings tab of this window.
Weight UoM The unit of measure used to specify the package weight.
Gross weight The gross weight of the package, including the weight of the box. For an automatically created package, the weight of the box has been added automatically. For manual packages, you can enter the gross weight.
Declared value

The estimated value of the package, to be used for insurance calculation.

Note

If you need to adjust the declared values for the packages, select the Manual packaging check box to prevent automatic recalculation of packages on any changes to the order or on automatic creation of shipments (which might reset the declared values to 0).

Cost of delivery

This check box indicates (if selected) that the package should be paid for on delivery.

Note

If you need to change this setting (Cost of delivery) for the package, select the Manual packaging check box to prevent automatic recalculation of packages on any changes to the order r on automatic creation of shipments (which might reset the Cost of delivery check box to the default value).

## The Discount details tab This tab has a table showing the **Document**- and **Group**-level discounts that we reapplied to the document. This tab is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window; it is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type. The table toolbar includes only standard buttons.
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the sales order. Selecting the check box updates the document total and the line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
Discount code The ID (code) of the discount applied to the document.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose series was applied to the document ( Group or Document ).
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually (one of the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as Manual in the Discount codes window).
Discountable amt. The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the amount.
Discountable qty. The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the item quantity.
Discount amt. The amount of the discount.
Discount percent The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item qty. The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount.
## The Shipments tab This tab has a table showing the invoiced shipments for the order.
Column Description
Shipment no. The reference number of a shipment created to fulfill the sales order.
Shipment type The type of the shipment.
Document no. Link to the shipment. Clicking the link opens the Shipments (SO302000) window.
Status The status of the shipment.
Shipment date The date of the shipment.
Shipped qty. The quantity of goods on the shipment.
Shipped weight The weight of the shipped goods in the shipment (net weight).
Shipped volume The volume of the shipment.
Invoice type The type of the invoice.
Invoice no. The reference number of the invoice generated for the shipment.
Inventory doc type The type of inventory document generated for the shipment.
Inventory ref. no. The reference number of the inventory document generated for the shipment.
Operation The inventory operation to be performed for the shipment: Issue or Receipt.
Order type The type of document that was used when creating this shipment. For details on each type, see About predefined types of sales orders.
## The Payments tab (This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.) By using this tab, you can create a prepayment or payment for this sales order or link the order to existing payments or prepayments (to reserve them for the order). No payment can be created for a sales order with any of the following statuses:**Voided**, **Cancelled**, **Pending approval**, or **Rejected**. > [!NOTE] > For more information, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). This tab has a table that shows the prepayments and payments reserved for this sales order.
Button Description
Create prepayment Opens the Payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a prepayment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
Create payment Opens the Payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a payment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so that you can view the details of the selected prepayment or payment.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document available for applying to the sales order.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment document.
Applied to order The amount of the payment to be applied to the order.
Transferred to invoice The amount of the payment that has been applied to the customer ledger invoice generated for the order.
Balance The balance of the order.
Status The status of the payment.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment amount The amount of the payment or prepayment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
## The Totals tab This tab displays the totals calculated for the document. ### The Order totals section
Element Description
Line total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount on all document lines with stock items and non-stock items that require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied. This total does not include the excise duty amounts, freight and premium freight amounts.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Manual amount column on the Document detailstab for lines of the Goods for warehouse and Non-stock goods line type.

Line total incl. excise duty The Line total incl. excise duty is calculated as the Line total + Excise duty total.
Misc. total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount on all document lines with non-stock items that do not require shipment, after Line-level discounts are applied.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Manual amount column on the Document details tab for lines with the Misc. charge line type.

Discount total

The discount total calculated for the document.

This total includes discounts of the Group and Document levels. The discounts of the Group and Document levels are listed on the Document details tab; the Line discounts are shown on the Document details tab.

This field is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

VAT total The VAT total calculated for the document.
### The Freight info section
Element Description
Order weight The total weight of the goods according to the document.
Order volume The total volume of goods according to the document.
Package weight Read-only. The total (gross) weight of the packages for this sales order, including the weight of the boxes used for packages. You can modify the gross weight of the packages in the Packages table of the Shop for rates dialog box that you can invoke on the Delivery settings tab by clicking the Packages button.
Freight cost (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The freight cost calculated for the document.
Freight

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The freight amount calculated in accordance with the shipping terms.

Note

For details, see: About freight calculation.

Premium freight

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

Any additional flat charges for handling the order.

Note

To correct the excessive freight charges in a previous order of the customer, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order. When entering a negative freight amount, make sure that the total amount in the order is greater than or equal to zero. Otherwise, an invoice that is generated for the order cannot be released.

Freight VAT category (This field does not appear for transfer orders.) The VAT category that applies to the total freight amount. By default, it is the tax category associated with the ship via code selected for the order.
### The Calculated amounts and quantities section
Element Description
Unshipped quantity The quantity of the stock items not yet shipped according to the sales order. The unshipped quantity for each line is specified in the Open qty. column.
Unshipped amount

The sum of unshipped amounts calculated for the lines with non-zero unshipped quantities of stock items.

The unshipped amount for each line is calculated as the amount in the Manual amount column (after Line-level discounts were applied) divided by the line quantity (the Qty. column) and multiplied by the unshipped quantity (the Open qty. column).

At the moment of order creation when no item quantities are shipped, the amount is equal to the Line total + VAT total + Excise duty total; this total does not include any freight amounts.

Quantity not yet invoiced

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The quantity of items that were not yet invoiced.

Amount not yet invoiced

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The sum of not yet invoiced amounts for the lines with stock and non-stock items (in the Amount not yet invoiced column on the Document details tab).

The amount not yet invoiced for each line is calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order.

At the moment of order creation when no invoice is generated, the amount is equal to Line total + Misc. total + Vat total - Discount total + Excise duty total. This total does not include any freight amounts.

Payment total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount that has been paid for this sales order.

Pre-authorised amount

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The amount authorised for the order during the payment processing but not yet captured.

Unpaid balance

The unpaid amount of the order or Order total minus Payments total minus Pre-authorised amount.

Once an invoice for the unpaid amount of the order is generated, the unpaid amount becomes 0.

## The Webhook notification tab {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ## The ROT and RUT details (Sweden) tab This tab is displayed when you select the **ROT or RUT deductible document** check box in the top part of this window. ### The ROT and RUT settings section
Element Description
Distribute automatically (check box) (check box) When this check box is selected, the amount will be distributed equally among the specified personal IDs.
RUT (check box) (check box) Select this option if the work is related to RUT (cleaning, maintenance, laundry) deduction.
ROT (check box) (check box) Select this check box if the work is related to ROT (repairs, conversion, extension) deduction. When you select this, you need to fill in either the Property field, or the Apartment and Corporate ID fields.
Apartment The apartment number.
Property The property number.
Corporate ID The housing cooperative’s ID.
### The ROT and RUT distribution section Here you can add the person(s) who will receive the tax deduction.
Column Description
Personal ID (YYYYMMDDNNNN) The personal ID in the format YYYYMMDDNNNN.
Amount The amount distributed to this person. If the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, you can edit this field and manually distribute the amount among the personal IDs.
Over 65 A check box that you select to indicate that this person is over 65 years old. This is not done automatically.
### The ROT and RUT totals section
Elemant Description
Total deductible amount The total amount that is tax deductible.
Other cost The total amount for items of the Other cost type, including VAT.
Material cost The total amount for items of the Material cost type, including VAT.
Work price The total price of labour hours (items of the Service type), including VAT. This is the amount eligible for tax deduction.
Distributed amount or Undistributed amount

When the Distribute automatically check box is selected, this will display the total amount distributed among the specified personal IDs.

When the Distribute automatically check box is not selected, this will display the amount still to be distributed manually among the specified personal IDs.

### The Balancing documents for ROT and RUT deduction section This section appears after the invoice is balanced, which is either after releasing the invoice or when sending the claim, depending on your setting for **Balance invoices on** on the **ROT and RUT settings (Sweden)** tab in the [Organisations (CS101500)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/organisations-cs101500/) or [Branches (CS102000)](/visma-net-erp/help/organisation-structure/organisation-structure-windows/branches-cs102000/) window. You can also invoke the balancing of invoices manually by using the **Balance** action in the [Claim ROT and RUT (AR531000)](/visma-net-erp/to-be-deleted/help/customer-ledger/customer-ledger-windows/claim-rot-and-rut-ar531000/) window.
Element Description
Balancing credit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing credit note to the customer, with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.
Balancing debit note ref. no. The automatically created balancing debit note to Skatteverket (The Swedish Tax Agency), with the deductible amount. You can click the link to view the document.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales orders (SO30100S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so30100s section You can use this new window to create a new order with the order types SO, CS, IN and QT, and order types based on these order templates, as well as to view and edit the details of existing orders of this type. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales orders (SO30100S) You can use this new window to create a new order with the order types SO, CS, IN and QT, and order types based on these order templates, as well as to view and edit the details of existing orders of this type. > [!NOTE] > that until further notice, this window is a limited version of the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. New tabs, fields and functionality will be added continuously.** This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can also cancel an order, and you can create a shipment for an order. For more information, see: [Work with sales orders (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/work-with-sales-orders-new/). > [!NOTE] > If you cannot find the functionality you need, you can click on the **Open in classic window** button to continue modifying the order in the [Sales orders (SO301000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-orders-so301000/) window. ## What to do from this window + [Create a sales order (new)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-sales-order-new/) + [Change the order status](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/change-the-order-status/) + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) + [Hide and rearrange columns](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/hide-and-rearrange-columns/) + [Update a column for all order lines](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/update-a-column-for-all-order-lines/) + [Mark line for purchasing and create purchase order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/mark-line-for-purchasing-and-create-purchase-order/) + [Print, email or export an order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/print-email-or-export-an-order/) + [Create a shipment](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-sales-orders/create-a-shipment/) ## Keyboard shortcuts The following table gives an overview of the keyboard shortcuts in the **Order lines** tab.
Key Description
Arrow down Moves focus one cell down until the last row. Scrolls table and lists one row down if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow left Moves focus one cell left until the first column. Scrolls table and lists one column left if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow right Moves focus one cell right until the last column. Scrolls table and lists one column right if next cell is beyond viewport.
Arrow up Moves focus one cell up until the first row. Scrolls table and lists one row up if next cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow down Moves focus to the bottommost cell in the current column, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow left Moves focus to the leftmost cell in the current row, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow right Moves focus to the rightmost cell in the current row, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Ctrl + arrow up Moves focus to the topmost cell in the current column, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
End Moves focus to the last (right- and bottommost) cell, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Enter

Switches to editing mode for the first input inside the currently focused cell. When you are already in editing mode, it saves the value and returns focus on the cell.

When you are focused on a link inside a cell, it redirects to the linked window.

Esc

When you are in editing mode, it discards any changes to the value and returns focus on the cell.

When you are focused on a link inside a cell, it returns focus on the cell.

Home Moves focus to the first (left- and topmost) cell, and scrolls view accordingly if the cell is beyond viewport.
Page down

Scrolls lists down by one page (number of visible rows) or to the bottom row.

Moves focus on the bottommost cell in the current table column.

Page up

Scrolls lists up by one page (number of visible rows) or to the top row.

Moves focus on the topmost cell in the current table column.

Shift + Tab Saves value of current input, if any, and moves focus to previous input or focusable table cell or element outside of the table. Enables table cell edit mode if applicable. Skips cells that are not editable or focusable.
Space Selects or deselects the check box, when editing mode is enabled for a check box inside a cell.
Tab Saves value of current input, if any, and moves focus to next input or focusable table cell or element outside of the table. Enables table cell edit mode if applicable. Skips cells that are not editable or focusable.
## The window toolbar
Button Description
Back Navigates back to the Sales orders list window.
Open in classic window Navigates to the Sales orders (SO301000) window for the selected sales order.
Actions
Email document
To initiate the process of sending the order as an email.
Create purchase order
To create a purchase order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order. This option is available when an order line is marked for purchasing and the order status is Open or Back order.
delete-icon-new Delete order
To delete the order.
Save Saves the document.
Create new order Creates a new document.
Activities Opens a list of all emails created for the customer. The emails are sent according to the set automation schedule.
Element Description
Order type

The available predefined order types are:

Sales order (SO)
A customer request to buy goods in the specified quantities on the specified date.
Cash sale (CS)
A document created to account for a cash sale that does not require shipping.
Invoice (IN)
A document used to invoice the customer for the shipped goods.
Quote (QT)
An agreement to sell specific goods with a specified price to the customer in the future.
Note

Currently, this window only supports the order types mentioned above. To create orders with other order types, go to the Sales orders (SO301000) window.

Order no. The order number of the document. For new documents, the system automatically generates this number by using the number series assigned to documents of the type.
### The following buttons will be available soon
Button Description
Actions
  • Create receipt To create a receipt for an order involving an authorised customer return; you invoke this action when the goods are actually received.

  • Copy order To copy the order to a new order. When you invoke this action, the Copy to dialog box opens. In the dialog box, you can select whether to recalculate prices and discounts and whether to cancel manual discounts.

    Note

    The allocations performed for any line of the original order are not copied, even for orders that require allocations.

    Note

    If you choose to copy the order by using the Copy/paste menu on the toolbar, while prices and discounts a recopied from the original order (without automatic updating and without recalculation of discounts), allocations are again not copied to a new order.

Prepare invoice
To prepare an invoice for the order.
Create transfer order
You can create a transfer order if it is necessary for fulfilling the sales order. When you click this action, the system redirects you to the Create transfer orders (SO509000) window.
Recalculate prices
To open the Recalculate prices dialog box, which you use to specify options for updating the prices and discounts for the document.
Reports Provides navigation to the Order confirmation (SO64111S) report, which you can use to print the sales order or quote for sending it to the customer.
## The top part
Element Description
Collapse Expand You can click this icon to collapse and expand this panel.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following options:

  • Hold: Indicates that the order is on hold and should not be processed further at this time. Orders with the Hold status can be changed to the Open status, and vice versa.
  • Credit hold: Indicates that the customer has failed the credit check.
  • Open: Indicates that the sales order is not on hold anymore, and shipment has not yet occurred.
  • Cancelled:

Indicates that the order has been cancelled.

You can select this status to cancel the order if it has one of the following statuses: Hold,Credit hold, Back order, or Open. You can open a cancelled order by selecting the Open status.

  • Shipping: Indicates that the order is being shipped. If a shipment can be created according to the shipping rules, the order’s status changes to Shipping. Each confirmed shipment updates the data on the order showing how many items are being shipped ( Quantity on shipments ) and how many items are still to be shipped ( Open quantity ).
  • Back order: Indicates that the order cannot be shipped because the specified items are not available. You can assign this status to an open order manually if, when you attempt to create a shipment, the system detects that the order cannot be shipped in full and displays a message about this. This status can be assigned to orders automatically when you run the Create shipments process by using the Process orders (SO501000) window if the shipping rules specified on the document level and on the line level do not allow shipment creation. If the Replan back orders check box is selected in the Inventory preferences (IN101000) window, on release of the appropriate inventory receipts, the requested quantities of items are re-planned (booked) for back orders, so that you can create shipments for these back orders by running the Create shipment process in the Process orders (SO501000) window. You can open a back-ordered order by selecting the Open status.
  • Invoiced: Means that the invoices for the order have been generated. This status is available only for orders of types that involve updating the customer ledger.
  • Completed: Indicates that all related inventory documents required for the order type have been generated and released.
Created by The user who created the selected sales order.
Last modified The time and date when the document was last modified.
Customer The customer that has ordered the goods or services. Click Edit to open the Customers (AR303000) window where you can view and edit the customer’s details.
Location

(This field is only active if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The customer location from which the goods or services have been ordered. Hover over Map to view the address for the selected location.

Date The date of the document.
Requested on

The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; this date provides the default values for the Requested on dates for order lines. The default value is the current business date.

When you change this date, the Scheduled shipment date in the Delivery settings tab changes automatically.

Note

If your order has existing order lines and you change this date, you can choose or decline to update all order lines with the new Requested on and scheduled shipment date.

Contact The contact person of the customer. You can only edit this field when the order status is Hold, Open, Back order, or Credit hold.
Customer order

(This field does not appear for orders of the TR type.)

The reference number of the original customer document that the sales order is based on.

External reference The reference number of the sales order in a third-party application if Visma Net is integrated with such an application and imports the sales orders from it. You can edit this field.
Ship via The ship via code that represents the carrier and its service to be used for shipping the ordered goods. For this ship via code, if Manual is specified as the freight calculation method, the freight cost must be specified in the Freight cost field on the Totals tab (in this window).
Salesperson

(This field only appears if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The salesperson to be used by default for each sales order line.

Project

(This field is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The project with which this document is associated, or the code indicating that this document is not associated with any project; the non-project code is specified in the Project accounting preferences (PM101000) window.

Description Here you can enter a description of the document, of max 255 characters.
Notes You can use this field to communicate key information about the document.
### The order overview section
Element Description
Cost

The total of the Cost total column on the lines of the sales order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Profit

The total profit calculated from the lines of the order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Margin (chart)

Displays the margin percentage of the selected sales order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Order total

The total amount of the document, which is calculated as follows:

Line total + Misc. total + Freight + Premium freight

– Discount total + VAT total

VAT taxable total The document total that is subject to VAT. The VAT taxable amount is only displayed in this field if the Include in VAT taxable total check box is selected for the applicable VAT in the VAT (TX205000) window.
VAT total The total amount of VAT paid on the document.
VAT exempt total The document total that is exempt from VAT. This total is calculated as the taxable amount for the VAT with the Include in VAT exempt total check box selected in the VAT (TX205000) window.
Discount total The total amount of discount on the sales order.
Line discount total The total amount of line discounts on the order.
Markup total

The total markup on the order.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Ordered quantity The sum of the quantity for all lines, with the exception of lines with line type Misc. charge.
Use replacement cost for margin/profit

When this check box is selected, the line level profit and margin values are calculated based on the line’s Supplier price or the line item’s last cost. When the check box is cleared, the default value for Unit cost is used.

You can change this value only when the order’s status is Hold, Open, Back order and Credit hold.

The default value for this check box is retrieved from the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.

### The following elements will be available soon
Element Description
Destination warehouse

(This field only appears if the TR order type is selected.)

The warehouse to which the goods should be transferred.

Credit hold

(This check box does not appear if the TR order type is selected.)

This check box indicates (if selected) that this customer order is on credit hold. This happens if the customer does not comply with the credit verification rules and if the Check credit on entry option is selected for orders of this type in the Order types (SO201000) window. However, if you need to create a new sales order for this customer as an exception and you, based on a user role, have access to the Credit hold check box, you can clear the Credit hold check box, save the order, and release the order. The initial amount of the order serves as this document’s credit limit, and if a user increases the amount, the system does not allow the order to be removed from credit hold in this way.

Show description on order confirmation and invoice Select this check box to show the description in the Description field on both the sales order confirmation and the invoice.
Print note on external sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to customer invoices.
Print line note on internal sales documents When this check box is selected, line notes will be printed to order confirmations.
## The Order lines tab This tab has a table that lists all the items included in the sales order. The line numbers are assigned automatically. Information on the applied manual discounts and the line-level discounts (if any are configured in your system) is shown on the tab. Lines with a **free item** are greyed out and read-only. > [!NOTE] > When you are creating a new order, you can enter the data manually or import the order details from a file in.xlsx or.csv format.
Button Description
delete-icon-new ( Delete line ) You click this button to initiate deletion of selected order lines. Save the document to complete deletion.
Import from Excel icon ( Import order lines )

You click this button to import an Excel document with order lines.

Make sure the column names in your Excel document match the column names in the table.

After import, lines will be added in the Order lines tab, it is not possible to update existing order lines.

Export to Excel icon ( Export to Excel ) You click this button to download an Excel document of the order lines with the columns you have selected in the table settings.
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Field Description
Find items You can start typing here or click Search-new to trigger the items list.
### The items list In this list, you can view the **On hand**, **Available** and **Available for shipping** quantity for each item accumulated for all warehouses. Click an item line to add it to the order.
Column Description
Item ID The item by its item ID.
Description The description of the item.
On hand The quantity on hand of this item.
Available The quantity available of the item, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
Available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with quantities on issues and quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

### The table
Column Description
Line The line number of the order line.
Item ID The stock or non-stock item to be sold, by its item ID.
Item description The description for the item selected in the line.
UoM

The unit of measure (UoM) used for the item.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Available for shipping

The quantity of the item available for shipping from the selected warehouse.

This value is calculated by the system based on the quantity on hand with the quantities shipped and on shipping deducted.

Note

The success icon Success is displayed when the quantity available for shipping is above zero. If the quantity available for shipping is zero, a warning icon Warning will be displayed.

Quantity The quantity of the item sold, measured in the UoM.
Unit price

The price for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item.

If you have entered the unit price manually and saved the document, the value will not be updated by the system when you change the document date. If you want to replace this price with the sales price currently available for the item, click the Reset price icon Reset price in the field.

Line total The extended price, which is the unit price multiplied by the quantity, deducted with the line discount.
Account The income account to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Use sales account from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column. See also: About suggested sales accounts.
Commissionable

(This column is only available if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

A check box that indicates that this line is subjected to sales commission. The details of commissions are shown on theCommissions tab.

Completed A check box that can be selected to indicate to the system that this line is completed.
Cost total

The extended cost of the item, which is the value in the Unit cost column multiplied by the quantity. You can manually enter an amount that is not based on the unit cost.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Discount amount

The amount of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

Based on the set discount amount, the discount percent will be calculated automatically.

To reset a manually set discount, click the Reset price icon Reset price in the field.

Discount code The code of the discount that has been applied to this line.
Discount %

The percent of the line-level discount that has been applied manually or automatically to this line item.

Based on the set discount percent, the discount amount will be calculated automatically.

To reset a manually set discount, click the Reset price icon Reset price in the field.

Discount series The ID of the discount sequence that has been applied to this line.
External link In this column, you can write a reference for the line to any other document or system.
Line type

The line type for the sales order line, which can be one of the following options:

Miscellaneous charge
for non-stock items that do not require shipment.
Goods for warehouse
for stock items.
Non-stock goods:
for non-stock items that require shipment.
Note

An icon that you can click to add or edit the line note. The icon displayed can be one of the following:

  • No note icon: there is no current line note, click the icon to add a line note.
  • Note: there is a line note. Hover over the icon to view the line note, and click the icon to edit or remove the note.
Open quantity The quantity of the item to be shipped; that is, the total quantity minus the quantity shipped according to closed shipment documents.
Overship threshold % The maximum percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) allowed by the customer. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Project task (This column is only available if the Project management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The particular task of the project with which this line is associated.
Purchase order source

The type of purchase order to be created to fulfill this line. This can be one of the following options:

See also:

Lines with Purchase to order or Drop-shipment will be visible in the Purchases workspace and available for adding to a purchase order.

The Purchase order source can be selected if the line item is a stock item, or a non-stock item that has both the Require shipment and Require receipt check boxes selected in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window.

Purchase order number The purchase order number(s) connected to the line. You can click on a number to open the purchase order in the Purchase orders (PO301000) window.
Quantity available The quantity available of the item, according to the availability calculation rules set in the Item classes (IN201000) window for the item’s item class.
Quantity details Click View to open the Inventory allocation details (IN402000) window for the line item and warehouse.
Quantity on hand The quantity on hand of the item.
Quantity on shipments A read-only column that displays the quantity of the stock item being prepared for shipment and already shipped for this order.
Reason code

The reason code to be used for creation or cancellation of the order, if applicable.

Only reason codes with the Sales and Issue usage can be selected.

Replacement cost total

The total replacement cost for the line, calculated as the replacement unit cost multiplied by the item quantity.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Replacement unit cost

The cost to replace the item, per unit.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Requested on The date when the customer wants to receive the goods; the default value is specified in the Requested on field in the top part. These dates can be different for different lines if the order-level shipping rule is Back orders allowed. For information on shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.
Salesperson

(This column only appears if the Commissions functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The salesperson associated with the sale of the line item.

Ship on

The date when the item should be shipped. By default, this date is calculated as a date that is earlier than the Requested on date (for this line) by the number of lead days but not earlier than the current business date. You can modify the date only if the order-level shipping rule is set to the Back orders allowed option on the Delivery settings tab.

In the Process orders (SO501000) window, you can select the orders for creating shipments by the Ship on dates specified in their lines if you select the By ship date option in the Select by field and specify the range for scheduled shipment dates in the Start date and End date fields.

Shipping rule

The way the line item should be shipped. Select one of the following options:

Back orders allowed
The ordered quantity can be delivered in multiple shipments. If the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped, and the remaining quantity (open quantity) can be shipped later. The line is not completed until it has a non-zero open quantity. The order gets the Back order status.
Cancel remainder
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment, but if the ordered quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.
Ship only when complete
The ordered quantity should be delivered in one shipment. If the ordered quantity is not available for shipping, the order with this line gets the Back order status.
Note

For more information, see: About shipping rules.

Supplier The name of the supplier that will supply the item.
Supplier price

This field is populated with the first available value in the following order of priority:

  1. The default supplier’s price for the item set in the Supplier prices (AP202000) window, the Price column.
  2. The default supplier’s Last supplier price, collected from the Stock items (IN202500) window, the Supplier details tab.

You can override the default supplier for the line item by changing the Supplier column for the line.

You can set the Supplier price manually if the Override supplier price check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window, the General information tab.

Undership threshold % The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) to consider the order shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
Unit cost

The cost for a single unit (the unit of measure is specified in the UoM column) of the item. For information about how the unit cost is calculated, see About item costs and valuation methods

If the Use replacement cost for margin/profit check box is selected, the Unit cost column displays the replacement cost.

> [!NOTE] > This information is displayed only for users with the Sales Profit Viewer role.

VAT category The VAT category ID that applies to the line item. See also: About suggested VAT categories.
Warehouse

The warehouse from which the specified quantity of the item should be delivered.

You can start typing here or click Search-new to trigger a list with the item’s On hand, Available, and Available for shipping quantity per warehouse.

This column only appears if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

### The following buttons will be available soon
Button Description
Allocations

(This button is only available if at least one of the following functionalities are enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window: Sales order to purchase order link, Multiple warehouse locations, and Lot and serial tracking.)

Opens the Allocations dialog box so that you can allocate the stock for the order and specify warehouse locations and lot or serial numbers of the items, if required for the order by order type settings.

For more details, see: the Order types (SO201000) window.

Add sales invoice

(This button is enabled for only return orders).

Opens the Add invoice details dialog box so that you can add a line or multiple lines from the selected invoice to this return order.

Purchase order link

(This button is only available for lines that have the Mark for purchase order check box selected.)

Opens the Purchasing details dialog box, which you use to link the sales order to an existing purchase order that has the required item listed.

Inventory summary Opens the Inventory summary (IN401000) window as a pop-up to display availability information about the selected stock item.
Assemble

A button that opens the Kit assembly dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

Kit specification

A button that opens the Kit specifications dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications (IN209500) window is available both for stock and non-stock items.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

View kit assembly Click this button to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Branch The branch that sells the item. This column only appears if you have multiple branches.
Invoice no.

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

A column that holds the reference number of the original invoice (which lists the goods that were ordered and later returned by the customer).

Operation

(This column only appears for orders of the return types: CR, RC, RR, and RM.)

The operation to be performed in the Inventory workspace to fulfill the order. An order of the RR or RM type includes lines with theReceipt operation and lines with the Issue operation. Orders of other return types include only lines with the Receipt operation.

Note

When you create an order of the RM type, you cannot save the order with the Open status until its balance is negative. Make sure the Hold check box is selected until you have added all the replacement and refund lines.

Note

For more details on return orders, see: Process returns.

Create issue automatically A check box that indicates (if selected) that a line of the Issue type will be created automatically for each order line of the Receipt type if the order is of the RR type.
Kit assembly

A link that opens the Kit assembly (IN307000) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit assembly dialog box is only available for stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

Kit specifications

A link that opens the Kit specifications (IN209500) dialog box for the kit item you have selected on the sales order line in the table. The Kit specifications dialog box is available both for stock and non-stock items. This functionality is also available by clicking the button with the same name in the table toolbar.

Note

In the bottom part of the window, you can see an assembly status line that informs you how many items can be assembled based on component availability.

View kit assembly Click this link to see kit assembly documents related to the sales order line.
Disc. unit price The unit price, which has been recalculated after the application of discounts.
Average cost

The total cost of the item in the warehouse, divided by the total quantity of the item in the warehouse.

(This column is only available if the setting Show gross margin/profit is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.)

Term start date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should start for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

Term end date

(This column only appears if the Deferred revenue management functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The date when the process of deferred revenue recognition should finish for the selected item; this date can be specified manually if the deferral code assigned to the item is based on the Flexible by periods, prorate by days or Flexible by days in period recognition method.

Amount not yet invoiced (This column is not available for orders of the Transfer type.) The amount not yet invoiced for the line, calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order.
Lot/serial no. (This column only appears if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and is only available for orders of the RR type.) The lot or serial number of the item for returns.
Expiration date The expiration date for the item with the specified lot number. The column only appears for orders of the RR type.
Alt. item ID The alternative ID for the item, such as the item ID used by the customer.
Subaccount The subaccount to be used for this line to record sales, according to the selected option in the Combine sales sub. from field in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can edit this column.
Order type The type of sales order in which this line item is listed.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order in which this line item is listed.
Sort order The order number of the document line. The system regenerates this number automatically when you reorder the lines in the table.
Base order qty The quantity of the item sold, expressed in the base unit of measure. This quantity is used for calculating discounts if The base UOM option is selected in the Apply quantity discounts to field on the Price/discount settings tab of the Customer ledger preferences (AR101000) window.
Deductible amount Read-only column. The amount your client can deduct for the line item, if the item is ROT or RUT deductible.
ROT or RUT deductible A check box that indicates (if selected) that the line item is ROT or RUT deductible, according to its settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) window. This only applies to non-stock items.
Item type

The Item type applies to a Domestic services deductible document. You can edit this column. The type of the item, as selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, the Domestic services settings (Sweden) section, the Type field. For a stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

For a non-stock item, this can be one of the following:

  • Service
  • Material cost
  • Other cost.

When there is no Type selected in the Stock items (IN202500) or Non-stock items (IN202000) window, Other cost is the default type.

Type of work The type of work the line item is related to, according to the item’s settings in the Non-stock items (IN202000) or Stock items (IN202500) window. You can edit this column.
Supplier currency ID The currency that is used in operations with the supplier, by its ID.
Supplier UoM The item’s unit of measure used by the supplier.
## The VAT details tab The columns in this tab contain information on all individual taxes applied to the document lines. The VAT listed on the tab are those that are included in both the VAT categories of line items and the VAT zone of the customer shipping location.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
VAT ID The ID of the specific VAT applied to the document.
VAT rate The VAT rate used for the VAT.
Taxable amount The taxable amount for the specific VAT calculated through the document.
VAT amount The VAT amount for the specific VAT.
Reverse VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this is a reverse VAT.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Statistical VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT will be calculated only for statistical purposes. Or, will be reported only, but not actually paid.
Pending VAT A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT is pending and will be recognised after completing the VAT recognition process.
Include in VAT exempt total A check box that indicates (if selected) that this VAT has a zero rate and is used to calculate a document subtotal that is actually exempt from VAT.
VAT type

The type of the VAT, which can be one of the following:

  • Sales
  • Use
  • VAT
  • Withholding
## The Commissions tab On the **Commissions** tab of the window, you can view the commissions calculated for this sales order. This tab only appears if the **Commissions** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
Salesperson ID The ID of the salesperson who participated in sales.
Salesperson name The salesperson who participated in sales.
Commission % The percentage of commission generally earned by the salesperson.
Commission amount The commission amount earned by the salesperson on this document.
Commissionable amount The amount used to calculate the commission.
## The Financial settings tab This tab holds the customer's invoice information for the sales order. ### The Invoice contact and address section If you make changes in this section and you want to reset to the default values, click the **Reset contact and address** icon ![Reset price](/media/visma-net-erp/Icon-16-reset.png).
Element Description
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity.
Address line 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address line 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
Address line 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The customer’s postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Financial information section
Element Description
Customer VAT zone

The VAT zone to be used to process customer sales orders, which generally is the zone associated with the customer’s delivery address.

By default, the customer VAT zone is set to the VAT zone of the customer location specified for the order. If the sales order was created from a quote that has a VAT zone specified, this VAT zone is by default set to the VAT zone specified for this quote.

If a VAT zone is not specified, the customer VAT zone is the VAT zone assigned to the selling branch.

Invoice separately A check box that indicates (if selected) that this document requires a separate invoice. The default value for this setting is retrieved from the Order types (SO201000) window.
Terms The payment terms used in relations with the customer.
Invoice number The reference number of the invoice generated for this order. This field is only available for orders of the Invoice (IN) type if the Invoice separately check box is selected. You can enter a reference number for the invoice if the numbering sequence assigned to invoices in the Order types (SO201000) window is configured for manual numbering.
Invoice date The date of the invoice generated for the order. You can enter the date manually if the Invoice separately check box is selected.
Due date The due date of the invoice according to the payment terms.
Cash discount date The date when the cash discount is available for the invoice based on the payment terms.
Post period The period to post the transactions generated by the invoice.
Owner The user who is responsible for the order. By default, it is the employee with whom the user who created the order is associated in the Users (SM201010) window, the Linked entity field.
Currency

(This field appears if the Multi-currency accounting functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The currency of the document.

Note

You can only change the customer’s default currency when the Enable currency override check box is selected in the Customers (AR303000) window.

Exchange rate The customer’s default exchange rate. This is a read-only field not affected by the Enable rate override setting in the Customers (AR303000) window.
Emailed A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order was emailed.
### The following fields will be available soon #### The Financial information section
Element Description
Branch The branch with which this order is associated.
Orig. order type The type of the original order; this field is available only for returns.
Orig. order no. The reference number of the original sales order (for returns).
## The Payment settings tab
Element Description
Payment method The payment method to be used to pay for the sales order. By default, it is the customer’s default payment method, but you can select another method for the order.
Cash account The cash account associated with the customer payment method. The field is filled in automatically with the cash account specified as the default for the selected method.
Payment reference The reference number of the payment.
### The following fields will be available soon
Element Description
Payment total Read only. This field shows the payment total amount.
Unpaid balance Read only. This field shows the amount that has not been paid if the sales order was paid partially.
Register transaction no. Read only. This field shows the reference number of the transaction that captured the specified amount.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains delivery information, including the selected customer location's delivery contact and address, shipping terms, and zone. ### The Delivery contact and address section If you make changes in this section and you want to reset to the default values, click the **Reset contact and address** icon ![Reset price](/media/visma-net-erp/Icon-16-reset.png).
Element Description
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone The default phone number of the customer.
Email The email address of the customer as a business entity. You can click email to open the email client of your choice.
Address line 1 The first line of the delivery address.
Address line 2 The second line of the delivery address.
Address line 3 The third line of the invoicing address.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set by using the About Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
### The Delivery information section
Element Description
Scheduled shipment

The date when the ordered goods are scheduled to be shipped. By default, it is the date that is specified in the Requested on field in the top part of this window, minus the number of lead days, but it is not earlier than the current business date. You can set this date manually.

Note

If your order has existing order lines and you change this date, you can choose or decline to update all order lines with the new scheduled shipment date.

Ship separately This check box indicates (if selected) that the goods for the customer should be shipped separately for each sales order.
Shipping rule

An option that controls whether incomplete and partial shipments for the order are allowed. Select one of the following options:

Ship only when complete
This option indicates that the required quantity should be delivered in one shipment. Nothing will be shipped until the complete quantity is in stock.
Back orders allowed
This option indicates that the required quantity can be delivered in more than one shipment, with the remainder back-ordered.
Cancel remainder
This option indicates that the required items should be delivered in one shipment, but if the requested quantity is not available, the available quantity is shipped and the remainder is cancelled.

For more information on processing sales orders with different shipping rules, see: About shipping rules.

Cancel by The date when the order should be cancelled if the Back orders allowed option has been selected in the Shipping rule field. The suggested date in this field is generated based on the value in the Days to keep field on the General settings tab in the Order types (SO201000) window.
Preferred warehouse ID The warehouse to be used by default for each sales order line.
FOB point The point where ownership of the goods is transferred to the customer.
Priority (This setting has no business logic tied to it in the current version and can only be used for informational purposes.) The level of priority for processing orders of this customer, as specified for the customer on the Delivery settings tab of the Customers (AR303000) window.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used for this customer.
Shipping zone The shipping zone of the customer.
### The Optional settings section
Element Description
Saturday delivery A check box that indicates (if selected) that the order may be delivered on Saturday.
Residential delivery A check box that you select to indicate that the shipment should be delivered to a residential area.
Insurance A check box that you select to indicate that insurance is required for this order.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Transaction type

A pick list where you select the transaction type to be used for Intrastat reporting.

You can also set a default transaction type for each order type. This is done in the Order types (SO201000) window.

## The Discount details tab This tab has a table showing the **Document**- and **Group**-level discounts that were applied to the document. This tab is available only if the **Customer and supplier discounts** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
Discount code The ID (code) of the discount applied to the document.
Series ID The ID of the discount series applied to the document.
Type The type of discount whose series was applied to the document ( D for Document or G for Group ).
Manual discount A check box that indicates (if selected) that the discount shown in this row has been applied manually (one of the Group- or Document- level discounts marked as Manual in the Discount codes (AR209000) window).
Discountable amount The amount used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the amount.
Discountable quantity The quantity used as a base for discount calculation if the discount is based on the item quantity.
Discount amount The amount of the discount.
Discount % The discount percent if by definition the discount is calculated as a percentage.
Free item The item ID of the free item, if one is specified by the discount applied to the document.
Free item quantity The quantity of the free item to be added as the discount.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Skip discount A check box that you select to cancel a Group - or Document -level discount for the sales order. Selecting the check box updates the document total and the line amounts, but does not remove the record of the cancelled discount from the Discount details table.
## The Shipments tab This tab has a table showing the shipments connected to the order.
Button Description
Table settings ( Table settings ) Opens the Column setup panel where you can hide/display columns and rearrange the column order. See also: Hide and rearrange columns.
Column Description
Shipment type The type of the shipment.
Shipment number The reference number of and link to the shipment. Clicking the link opens the Shipments (SO302000) window.
Shipment date The date of the shipment.
Shipped quantity The quantity of goods on the shipment.
Shipped weight The weight of the shipped goods in the shipment (net weight).
Shipped volume The volume of the shipment.
Invoice type The type of the invoice.
Invoice number The reference number of the invoice generated for the shipment.
Inventory document type The type of inventory document generated for the shipment.
Inventory reference number The reference number of the inventory document generated for the shipment.
### The following table columns will be available soon
Column Description
Status The status of the shipment.
## The Totals tab This tab displays the totals calculated for the document. ### The Order totals section
Element Description
Line total

The total amount on all document lines with stock items and non-stock items that require shipment, after line-level discounts are applied. This total does not include the freight and premium freight amounts.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Line total column on the Order linestab for lines of the Goods for warehouse and Non-stock goods line type.

Miscellaneous total

The total amount on all document lines with non-stock items that do not require shipment, after line-level discounts are applied.

This total is calculated as the sum of the amounts in the Line total column on the Order lines tab for lines of the Miscellaneous charge line type.

### The Freight information section
Element Description
Order weight The total weight of the goods according to the document.
Order volume The total volume of goods according to the document.
Freight cost The freight cost calculated for the document.
Freight amount

The freight amount calculated in accordance with the shipping terms.

Note

For details, see: About freight calculation.

Premium freight amount

Any additional flat charges for handling the order.

Note

To correct the excessive freight charges in a previous order of the customer, you can manually adjust the premium freight amount in the current order. When entering a negative freight amount, make sure that the total amount in the order is greater than or equal to zero. Otherwise, an invoice that is generated for the order cannot be released.

Freight VAT category The VAT category that applies to the total freight amount. By default, it is the tax category associated with the ship via code selected for the order.
### The Calculated amounts and quantities section
Element Description
Unshipped amount

The sum of unshipped amounts calculated for the lines with non-zero unshipped quantities of stock items.

The unshipped amount for each line is calculated as the amount in the Line total column divided by the line quantity (the Quantity column) and multiplied by the unshipped quantity (the Open quantity column).

At the moment of order creation when no item quantities are shipped, the amount is equal to the Line total; this total does not include any freight amount.

Unshipped quantity The quantity of the stock items not yet shipped according to the sales order. The unshipped quantity for each line is specified in the Open quantity column.
Amount not yet invoiced

The sum of not yet invoiced amounts for the lines with stock and non-stock items.

The amount not yet invoiced for each line is calculated as the line amount (after line discounts were applied) minus the line amount in the invoice or invoices generated for the order.

At the moment of order creation when no invoice is generated, the amount is equal to Line total plus Misc. total plus VAT total minus Discount total.This total does not include any freight amount.

Quantity not yet invoiced The quantity of stock and non-stock items that were not yet invoiced.
### The following fields will be available soon #### The Calculated amounts and quantities section
Element Description
Payment total

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The total amount that has been paid for this sales order.

Pre-authorised amount

(This field does not appear for transfer orders.)

The amount authorised for the order during the payment processing but not yet captured.

Unpaid balance

The unpaid amount of the order or Order total minus Payments total minus Pre-authorised amount.

Once an invoice for the unpaid amount of the order is generated, the unpaid amount becomes 0.

## The following tabs will be available soon ### The Payments tab (This tab is not available for orders of the **Transfer** type.) By using this tab, you can create a prepayment or payment for this sales order or link the order to existing payments or prepayments (to reserve them for the order). No payment can be created for a sales order with any of the following statuses:**Voided**, **Cancelled**, **Pending approval**, or **Rejected**. > [!NOTE] > For more information, see [About payment reservation for sales orders](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/about-payment-reservation-for-sales-orders/). This tab has a table that shows the prepayments and payments reserved for this sales order.
Button Description
Create prepayment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a prepayment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
Create payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so you can create a payment for this sales order. This action is not available for orders with the Voided or Cancelled status. If approval of sales orders is configured in your system, this action is not available for orders with the Pending approval or Rejected status.
View payment Opens the Customer payments (AR302000) window as a pop-up so that you can view the details of the selected prepayment or payment.
Column Description
Doc. type The type of payment document available for applying to the sales order.
Ref. no. The reference number of the payment document.
Applied to order The amount of the payment to be applied to the order.
Transferred to invoice The amount of the payment that has been applied to the customer ledger invoice generated for the order.
Balance The balance of the order.
Status The status of the payment.
Payment ref. The reference number of the payment.
Payment method The payment method used for the payment.
Cash account The cash account associated with the payment method.
Payment amount The amount of the payment or prepayment.
Currency The currency of the payment.
### Domestic services details (Sweden) tab
Element Description
Distribute automatically Select this check box to distribute the amount automatically.
Repairs, conversion, extension Select this option if the work is related to ROT deduction.
Cleaning, maintenance, laundry Select this option if the work is related to RUT deduction
Apartment Enter the apartment number
Property Enter the property number
Corporate ID Enter the corporate ID of the housing cooperative
Personal ID Enter the personal ID or the personal IDs of the persons to distribute the amount on. The amount will be divided automatically between the persons.
Amount The amount that should be distributed to the registered personal ID
Total deductible amount The amount that will be deducted from the work price.
Other cost The total of other costs.
Material cost The total of material costs.
Work price The total price of the work.
Distributed/Undistributed amount Depending on if you have the Distribute automatically check box selected or not, you will either see the distributed amount or the undistributed amount under the Domestic services totals section. The distributed amount is the amount that will be reported to Skatteverket.
## The window footer
Element Description
Total The order total in the used currency.
x line(s) in this sales order The number of lines in the order.
Preview document (button) You can click this button to open the order or quote in the Order confirmation (SO64111S) or Quote (SO64101S) report, which you can use to print the document to send it to the customer.
Create shipment (button)

(This button does not appear for order types that do not require shipment.)

You can click this button to create a shipment for the sales order.

Note

For a sales order line that has an open shipment, you cannot create a new shipment until the open shipment is confirmed.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Sales order list (SO40101S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-list-so40101s page 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order list (SO40101S) This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The top part
Button Description
View order When you click this button, the system opens a pop-up of the Sales orders (SO301000) window for the selected line.
View customer When you click this button, the system opens a pop-up of the Customers (AR303000) window for the selected line.
Element Description
Order type

Select the order type for which you want to display orders, which can be any of the active order types in the Order types (SO201000) window. You can leave the field blank to display orders of all types.

For details on each type, see: About predefined types of sales orders and About predefined order types for customer returns.

The predefined order types include the following:

  • Credit note (CM)
  • Cash sale (CS)
  • Cash return (CR)
  • Invoice (IN)
  • Quote (QT)
  • Return for credit (RC)
  • Generic authorised return (RM)
  • Return with replacement (RR)
  • Sales order (SA)
  • Sales order (SO)
  • Transfer (TR)
Status

Select for which status you want to display orders. The default status is Open.

Available options are:

View all
Orders with all statuses.
Open
Indicates (if applicable) that the sales order is not on hold anymore, the customer has passed the credit check, and shipment has not yet occurred.
On hold
Additions and changes can be made to these orders and order quantities do not affect the item availability.
Credit hold
Orders for which the customer has failed the credit check.
Completed
Orders for which all related inventory documents required for the order type have been generated and released.
Cancelled
Orders that have been cancelled.
Back order
Orders that cannot be shipped because the specified items are not available.
Shipping
Orders that are being shipped.
Invoiced
Orders for which invoices have been generated.

See Sales orders (SO301000) for more detailed status descriptions.

Customer

The customer that has ordered the goods or services.

If the TR order type is selected, Customer is read-only and displays your company ID and business name.

Owner The user name of the user to whom the activity is assigned. Leave the field blank to view information on all owners.
Salesperson The salesperson for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all salespersons.
## The table
Column Description
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Customer name The customer of the order.
Customer no. The ID of the customer.
Description The description of the order according to the Description field in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Date The date the order was created.
Status The status of the order.
Currency The currency used in the order.
Type

The type of customer ledger document that has been or is to be generated on release of this document, according to template settings in the Order types (SO201000) window.

Possible types are Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, and No update (which means no customer ledger documents have been or will be created).

Sched. shipment The date when the shipment for this order is scheduled (as specified in the Sched. shipment field on the Delivery settings tab of the Sales orders (SO301000) window).
Customer VAT zone The VAT zone to be used to process customer sales orders, which generally is the zone associated with the customer’s delivery address.
Discount total The discount total calculated for the order.
VAT taxable total (This column is only available if the VAT reporting functionality is enabled in your system.) The order total that is subjected to VAT.
Order total The total amount of the order.
Owner The user responsible for the order.
Salesperson The salesperson associated with the order.

Related pages

Windows

Sales order preferences (SO101000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/sales-order-preferences-so101000 page This window holds settings that affect the Inventory workspace as a whole, including processing, posting, and approval settings. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order preferences (SO101000) This window holds settings that affect the Inventory workspace as a whole, including processing, posting, and approval settings. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## What to do from this window + [Display profit and margin totals](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/manage-document-types-and-work-flows/display-profit-and-margin-totals/) ## The General settings tab You can use this tab to select the default order types and price validation options, as well as to specify the processing options for shipments and documents created and generated in the workspace. ### The Data entry settings section
Element Description
Default sales order type The type of sales order that will appear as the default sales order type in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Default transfer order type (This element is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The type of transfer order that will appear as the default transfer order type in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.
Show gross margin/profit

If you select this check box, the totals for margin, profit and markup are displayed in the Sales orders (SO301000) window.

Note

This does not apply to the Sales orders (SO30100S) window. There, these values are only displayed when the user has the Sales Profit Viewer role.

Kit cost based on components Select this check box if you want the cost in the Sales orders (SO301000) window to be based on components instead of the kit itself.
Use replacement cost for margin/profit Select this check box if you want to use the default supplier’s price for the item or the item’s last cost, instead of the item’s default unit cost, to calculate margin and profit.
Override supplier price If you select this check box, you can override the supplier price.
Shipment number series The numbering sequence to be used to assign IDs to shipments when a new shipment is created by using the Shipments (SO302000) window.
Advanced availability validation This check box indicates (if selected) that a shipment document cannot be saved if the updated available quantity of any item listed on the document will result in a negative value.
### The Price settings section
Element Description
Validate min. markup

An option that controls whether the minimum markup, set on the Price/cost information tab of the Stock items (IN202500) window for stock items and on the similar tab of the Non-stock items (IN202000) window for non-stock items, will be validated when the user manually enters a unit price on a sales order, an invoice, or the Sales prices (AR202000) window. Select one of the following values:

No validation
To not perform minimum mark-up validation for prices that users enter on documents.
Warning
To display warnings when users enter prices that don’t meet the minimum mark-up requirement.
Set to minimum
To automatically set prices to the values that ensure the minimum mark up when users enter prices that provide a mark-up percentage lower than the minimum.
Use a price adjustment multiplier A check box that (if selected) causes the system to calculate prices for non-base units of measure by using the price adjustment factor along with the conversion factor. If the check box is cleared, the system ignores the price adjustment factor when calculating prices.
### The Freight calculation settings section This section only if the **Inventory** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Freight allocation on partial shipping

For partial shipments, the way the premium freight amount should be allocated among shipments:

Full amount first time
To assign the premium freight total amount to the first shipment created for the order.
Allocate proportionally
To distribute the premium freight total amount among shipments proportionally to the amounts of the partial shipments.
### The Shipment settings section
Element Description
Free item shipping

This element is available only if the Customer and supplier discounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

The way the free items should be distributed among partial shipments of all the goods specified in the sales order. Select one of the following options:

  • Proportional The free items should be distributed among shipments proportionally to the amounts of each shipment.

    Note

    If the total quantity of free items on all partial shipments for the order is less than the quantity initially calculated for the applicable group discount (which may happen because the system rounds the free item quantity down on each partial shipment), you can add the missing quantity of the free item manually to any of the partial shipments.

  • On last shipment The free items should be added to the last shipment that is based on the sales order.

Hold shipments on entry This check box indicates (if selected) that a newly created shipment will have the On hold status by default.
Validate shipment total on confirmation This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipment confirmation can be saved only after you enter the shipment total in the Control total field.
Add zero lines for items which are not in stock

This check box indicates (if selected) that pick lists and shipments will be generated with lines for items currently not in stock.

This option can be selected if you have classes of stock items for which a negative quantity is allowed and if you don’t want to rely completely on availability data (in some cases, although the system shows an item as not in stock, the quantities required for a shipment may be available for some reason). Then for order lines with the Back orders allowed shipping rule, a zero-quantity line will be added to a shipment if the item is not in stock, and you will be able to manually enter the quantity of the item that is actually available. See: About shipping rules.

You can also select this option because customers may want to view the lines for items that were ordered but not shipped.

Create zero shipments

A check box that indicates (if selected) that a shipment can be created even if there are no available items for any lines.

We do not recommend selecting this check box if in your organisation, shipments are generally created automatically by using the Process orders (SO501000) window.

This check box is available only if the Inventory functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

Update the warehouse automatically when shipment is confirmed This check box indicates (if selected) that system will automatically update the warehouse once the shipment is confirmed.
### The Invoice settings section
Element Description
Hold invoices on failed credit check A check box that indicates (if selected) that an edited invoice can be saved only with the On hold status if the customer fails the credit check.
Use shipment date for invoice date A check box that you select if you want the shipment dates to appear in invoices as invoice dates. If the check box is cleared, the current business date will be used as the default date for invoices when they are automatically generated for confirmed shipments.
### The Posting settings section
Element Description
Automatically release inventory documents This check box indicates (if selected) that the inventory documents generated on release of the sales documents will be automatically released in the Inventory workspace. If the check box is not selected, the inventory documents generated on release of the sales documents should be manually released in the Inventory workspace.
Use shipped-not-invoiced account

This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipped-not-invoiced account (and subaccount, if applicable) should be used for cost transactions (instead of the COGS accounts) to delay posting to COGS accounts.

You can select this option if your organisation processes customer invoices for shipments later than inventory issues. Then when issues are released, the costs will be temporarily recorded (as debit amounts) to the shipped-not-invoiced account (and subaccount), and on release of invoices, the costs will be moved from the shipped-not-invoiced account to the COGS (expense) account. For more details, see: About shipment processing options.

Shipped-not-invoiced account The expense account to be used as the shipped-not-invoiced account if the Use Shipped-not-invoiced- account check box is selected.
Shipped-not-invoiced sub.

The subaccount to be used as the shipped-not-invoiced subaccount if the Use shipped-not-invoiced account check box is selected.

This field is available only if the Subaccounts functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.

### The Sales profitability settings section This section is available only if the **Kit assembly** functionality is enabled in the [Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000)](/visma-net-erp/help/common-settings/enable-or-disable-functionalites/enable-disable-functionalities-cs100000/) window.
Element Description
Cost calculation basis for non-stock kits

Select one of the following options:

  • Stock component cost
  • Non-stock kit standard cost
  • Non-stock kit standard cost plus stock component cost
## The Reporting settings tab This tab contains the list of the predefined mailings for customers. Mailings are used to send electronic versions of documents (by email) to customers and to company employees who oversee operations with customers. The mailing settings specified here are used as default values for mailing settings of customer classes, which in turn provide default values for mailings configured for particular customers. Emails for active mailings will be sent to customer contacts and company employees when a user invokes the action specific to the mailing. Such emails can contain sales orders, pick lists, shipment confirmations, invoices, or dunning letters. You can modify predefined mailings or add new custom mailings. To add a new custom mailing to be used for customers, you need to define automation steps for the windows in which specific documents are created or processed. The tab includes the **Default sources** table, with the list of mailings, and the **Default recipients** table, with the list of recipient types. ### The Default sources table By using the **Default sources** table, you can create a list of active mailings that can be used for customers. You can select the report or an email template (notification template) to be used as the body of the emails generated for the mailing.
Column Description
Mailing ID

The unique ID of the mailing. An alphanumeric string of up to 10 characters can be used. Select one of the following predefined mailings, which are designed to inform users and external contacts about the particular events:

Pick list
A pick list being created for an order
Quote
A change in the status of a quote
Sales order
A changes to a sales order
Shipment
The confirmation of a shipment
SO invoice
A sales invoice that is ready to be released
Default email account The system email account to be used by default for the mailing. If no account is specified, the default system account will be used.
Report ID The ID of the sales orders report to be used as the email’s body (if a report is used for this mailing). Select the report from the list.
Notification template

The email template to be used to generate the body of the email (if an email template is used for this mailing).

Caution

For each mailing, you can use only one of the options as the body of the email: a report or a notification template (email template).

Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent by default if a recipient has no other preferences. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that this mailing is active. Only active mailings can be used.
### The Default recipients table You use this table to create and modify the list of default recipient types for the mailing selected in the **Default sources** area.
Column Description
Contact type

The type of contact to receive emails generated for the mailing.

Select one of the following:

Primary
Contacts specified as primary contacts of particular customers, or customers of specific classes
Remittance
Contacts specified as remittance contacts of particular customers, or customers of specific classes
Shipping
Contacts specified as the shipping contacts of particular customers, or customers of specific classes
Employee
An employee of your company who handles the documents of (or is otherwise associated with) the customer class or customer
Contact ID The ID of the recipient. A particular recipient can be selected only if Employee was specified as the Contact type. This employee will receive all the emails generated for the selected mailing.
Format The format in which the report (if applicable) will be sent. Select one of the following options: HTML, Excel, or PDF.
Active This check box indicates (if selected) that this contact or contact type is active. Only active recipients receive the emails.
Bcc This check box indicates (if selected) that this contact or contacts of the type will receive a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the emails for the selected mailing.

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Shipments (SO302000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipments-so302000 page You can use this window to create shipment documents for a sales order or for multiple sales orders of the same customer, as well as to view shipment documents that the system automatically generated for sales orders. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipments (SO302000) You can use this window to create shipment documents for a sales order or for multiple sales orders of the same customer, as well as to view shipment documents that the system automatically generated for sales orders. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## What to do from this window + [Process a back order for a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/process-a-back-order-for-a-sales-order/) + [Create multiple shipments for one sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-returns/create-multiple-shipments-for-one-order/) + [Add lines that are not in a sales order](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/add-shipment-lines-that-are-not-in-a-sales-order/) + [Cancel shipments](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/process-shipments/cancel-shipments/) ## The window toolbar
Button Description
Actions

Provides the following actions, which you can perform depending on the status of the shipment:

Confirm shipment
Changes the shipment’s status to Confirmed, marks the boxes included in the shipment as Confirmed on the Packages tab, and initiates recalculation of packages if there were changes since the shipment was previously saved.
Prepare invoice
Generates an customer ledger invoice for the shipment and changes the shipment status to Completed.
Prepare drop-ship invoice
Generates an invoice for the shipment, which fulfills a drop-ship order. (This option is available only if the Drop shipments functionality is enabled in your system.)
Update inventory
Generates an inventory issue for the shipment. The issue will be released automatically if the Automatically release inventory documents check box is selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Correct shipment
Reopens the confirmed shipment if it was not invoiced.
Cancel return
Cancels the return.
Email shipment
Generates an email with shipment confirmation in accordance with the SHIPMENT mailing settings of this customer.
Print pick list
Brings up the Pick list (SO644000) report for the shipment, so you can print it. Once a pick list has been generated and printed for the shipment, the shipment will not appear in the Process shipments (SO503000) window for the Print pick list action unless the Show printed check box is selected in the top part of that window.
Reports

Provides access to the following reports:

Print shipment confirmation
Navigates to the Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) report for the shipment, so you can print it.
Print pro forma invoice
Navigates to the Pro forma invoice (SO64300S) report, so you can print it.
## The top part Here, you can specify general information about the shipment document.
Element Description
Shipment no. The unique reference number of the document, which is automatically generated by the system in accordance with the numbering sequence assigned to shipments in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Type

The type of the shipment document, which can be one of the following options:

Shipment
A document for normal shipments used to fulfill sales orders.
Transfer
A document for transfers between warehouses.
Status

The status of the document, which can be one of the following options:

On hold
This status means that the shipment cannot be processed until the Hold check box is cleared. The Hold shipments on entry option is located in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Open
This status indicates that the shipment is being prepared, and you can print a pick list for a specific shipment (or for multiple shipments). The shipment is still open while items are being picked and packed. After the shipment is packed and before the shipment is confirmed, you can print a shipment confirmation document by using the Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) report, if needed.
Confirmed
This status indicates that the shipment has been confirmed as shipped.
Completed
This status reflects that a sales invoice was generated for the shipment.
Hold This check box indicates (if selected) that the documents cannot be processed further until the check box is cleared.
Operation The operation to be performed in the Inventory workspace for this shipment: Issue or Receipt.
Shipment date The date when the document has been created.
Customer (This field does not appear for transfers.) The customer to whom the goods specified in the document should be shipped.
Location (This field is only displayed if the Business account locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The customer location to receive the shipment.
Warehouse ID (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse from which the goods should be shipped.
To warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window and available only for transfers.) The warehouse to which the goods should be shipped in case of a transfer.
Work group The work group to approve the shipment.
Owner The user assigned to approve the document.
Shipped quantity The quantity of goods shipped.
Shipped weight The weight of the goods shipped.
Shipped volume The total volume of the items in the shipment.
Packages The number of boxes included in this shipment.
Package weight The total weight of the shipment that includes the weight of boxes (for boxes determined automatically).
Package volume The sum of the values in the Volume column in the Packages tab.
Control quantity The control value, which you manually enter as a value equal to the shipped quantity if the Validate shipment total on confirmation check box has been selected in the Sales order preferences (SO101000) window.
Print order line note This check box indicates (if selected) that the order line note will be printed on the document.
## The Document details tab This tab displays the details of one or more sales orders that will be fulfilled by this shipment. If lot or serial numbers were specified for the items on the sales orders, item quantities are split by their lot or serial numbers.
Button Description
Allocations

(This button is only displayed if any of the Sales order to purchase order link, or Lot and serial tracking, or Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

Opens the Allocations dialog box, so that you can specify the locations, or lot or serial numbers for the units of the of the item. For items for which lot or serial numbers are tracked with the When received assignment method specified in the Lot/serial classes (IN207000) window, you can select units with specific lot or serial numbers. For items with the When used assignment method, you can generate or specify manually the lot or serial numbers for the units to be shipped.

Add order Opens the Add sales order dialog box so that you can add to the shipment the selected items from other sales orders of the same customer.
Inventory summary Navigates to the Inventory summary (IN401000) window, so you can view detailed information about stock items available at warehouses.
Column Description
Order type The type of the order to which the shipment line belongs.
Order no. The reference number of the order to which the shipment line belongs.
Item ID The ID of the item being shipped.
Free item (This column does not appear for transfers.) The free item earned by the customer, if applicable.
Warehouse

(This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)

The warehouse from which the item is shipped. You can not set a warehouse different than the Warehouse ID in the top part.

Location (This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse from which the item is shipped.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item in shipment.
Shipped qty. The quantity of the item shipped.
Ordered qty. The quantity of the item ordered.
Open qty. The number of items still to be shipped.
Lot/serial no. (This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The lot or serial number of particular items of the item.
Expiration date The expiration date of the item, if it is traced for this item ID.
Reason code The reason code used for shipments.
Shipment no.

Read only.

The reference number of this shipment in which the line item is listed.

Line no.

Read only.

The line number of the shipment.

Order line no.

Read only.

The order’s line number that matches this shipment line.

Original qty.

Read only.

The item’s quantity in the original order.

CN code Commodity codes according to the Combined nomenclature (CN) annually revised and published as a Commission regulation in the EU, Requirement for Intrastat reporting (looked up from the Stock items - General information tab - Intrastat section).
Country of origin The country the shipments is sent from.
Description A short description for the shipment.
Net weight The net weight of the shipment.
External link A read-only column displaying the external link for the line, collected from the corresponding sales order.
Shipping rule The shipping rule for the line item. For details, see: About shipping rules.
Supplementary measure unit Standardised codes (EU) for measure units for Intrastat reporting. Required for certain types of items.
Unassigned qty. The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Undership Threshold (%) The minimal percentage of goods shipped (with respect to the ordered quantity) to consider the order shipped completely. This setting is not applicable to items with specified serial or lot numbers that should be shipped exactly as specified.
### The Allocations dialog box This dialog box is available if at least one of these functionalities are enabled: **Multiple warehouse locations**, or **Lot serial tracking**.) By using this dialog box, you can view how the specified on the line quantity of the item can be distributed between locations available in the warehouse selected in the **Warehouse ID** field in the top part of the window, and you can select the locations, lot or serial numbers (from those available in the selected warehouse) for the item's quantity. Also, you can generate and assign lot/serial numbers to the specified quantities of the stock item if relevant. Whether lot or serial numbers should be generated when the item is received or used depends on the **Assignment method** option selected for the lot/serial class of the item in the [Lot/serial classes (IN207000)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/lot-serial-classes-in207000/) window. The **Allocations** dialog box includes the following elements.
Element Description
Unassigned qty The quantity of the stock item that has no lot or serial numbers assigned.
Quantity to generate The quantity of the stock item for which lot or serial numbers should be generated.
Start lot/serial number The lot or serial number to be used as a start number. (This element is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Generate A button that you click to initiate the generation of lot or serial numbers. (This button is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.)
Column Description
Item ID ID of the item to be allocated.
Location (This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse that is selected in the Warehouse ID field in the top part.
Lot/serial no. (This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled in your system.) The serial number of the unit of stock item or the lot number of the specified quantity of stock item; you can select from the serial or lot numbers available for the selected warehouse.
Quantity The quantity of the stock item with the same subitem code and the same lot/serial number. It is 1 for an item with a serial number.
UoM The unit of measure (UoM) for the specified quantity of the stock item.
Expiration date The expiration date of the specified quantity of the stock item. This column is only displayed if the Lot and serial tracking functionality is enabled.
Description The description of the item.
OK (button) Saves the records generated.
### The Add sales order dialog box You use this dialog box to add items from a selected sales order of the same customer to the shipment if sales orders of this type are not required to be shipped separately. The **Ship separately** check box can be found in the [Order types (SO201000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-types-so201000/) window.
Element Description
Operation The operation to be performed with the inventory: Issue or Return.
Order type The type of order to be added to the shipment.
Order no. The reference number of the order.
Item ID The item ID of the item being shipped.
UoM The unit of measure used for the item in shipment.
Location (This column is only displayed if the Multiple warehouse locations functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The location in the warehouse from which the item is delivered.
Lot/serial no. The lot or serial number of the particular item.
Sched. ship. date The scheduled shipment date of the order.
Quantity The quantity of the item ordered on the line of the sales order.
Line description The description provided for the line of the sales order.
Button Description
Add Adds the selected items.
Add and close Adds the selected items and closes the dialog box.
Cancel Closes the dialog box.
## The Orders tab This tab of has a table with the orders this shipment fulfils.
Column Description
Order type The type of the order.
Order no. The reference number of the sales or transfer order.
Shipped qty. The quantity of goods shipped in accordance with the order.
Shipped weight The weight of the goods shipped in accordance with the order.
Shipped volume The volume of the goods shipped in accordance with the sales or transfer order.
Invoice type The type of invoice for the goods shipped for the sales order.
Invoice no. The reference number of the invoice for the goods shipped.
Inventory doc. type The type of the inventory document that lists the items for this shipment.
Inventory ref. no. The reference number of the inventory document that lists the items for this shipment.
Order type The type of order according to which the goods are shipped.
Order no. The reference number of the sales order.
Discount code The discount applied to the sales order.
Sequence ID The discount sequence applied to the sales order.
Type The type of discount that was applied to the order.
Discountable qty. The line or document quantity of the sales order that earned the discount.
Free item A free item (by its item ID) earned by the customer due to the discount.
Free item qty. The quantity of free items earned by the customer due to the discount.
## The Delivery settings tab This tab contains delivery information, including the customer ship-to address (or address of the destination warehouse for transfers), carrier, and FOB point. ### The Delivery address contact section
Element Description
Override contact A check box that you select to not use+ the default contact information and to type new contact information.
Business name The legal business name of the customer to appear on the documents.
Attention The attention line as it is used in your company’s business letters. This line will be used to direct the letter to the proper person or department.
Phone 1 The default phone number of the customer.
### The Delivery address section
Element Description
Email The email address of the customer shipping contact.
Override address A check box that you select to not include the default address information and to type new address information.
Address 1 The first line of the invoicing address.
Address 2 The second line of the invoicing address.
City The customer’s city.
Country The customer’s country.
County The county or province of the customer.
Postcode The postcode. An input mask for the postcode can be set in the Countries/counties/postcodes (CS20400S) window.
### The Delivery information section
Element Description
Ship via The carrier used for shipping the goods.
FOB point The point where title of goods passes to the customer.
Shipping terms The shipping terms used in relations with the customer.
Shipping zone ID The shipping zone of the customer.
Residential delivery This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipping address is a residential one.
Saturday delivery This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipment may be delivered on Saturday.
Insurance This check box indicates (if selected) that insurance is required for the shipment.
Freight currency (This field does not appear for transfers.) The currency to be used for the shipment freight. By default, it is the currency of the sales order, but you can change it if needed.
Freight cost The freight cost of the shipment.
Freight amt. The amount of freight the customer will be charged for the shipment.
### The Intrastat section
Element Description
Transaction type The 1-digit code that describes the nature of the transaction (according to EU regulations for Intrastat reporting).
Mode of transportation

The method of transportation. You can choose between:

  1. Unknown

  2. Transport by sea

  3. Transport by rail

  4. Transport by road

  5. Transport by aeroplane

5.Consignments by posts

  1. Fixed transport installations

  2. Transport by inland waterway

Container This check box indicates (if selected) that the shipment gets marked as shipped in container for Intrastat reporting purposes.
## The Packages tab On this tab, you can view a table showing the packages (boxes) prepared and shipped for the shipment.
Button Description
Refresh packages Initiates recalculation of packages for the shipment. This button is only available if the Automatic packaging functionality is enabled in your system.
Column Description
Confirmed This check box indicates (if selected) that shipping of the package specified on the line has been confirmed.
Box ID The box used for the package.
Type The type of package: Auto or Manual. Only automatically created packages (boxes) can be refreshed and re-packed.
Description The description of the item or description of the box contents; required for return labels.
Weight The gross weight of the package. For packages that have been suggested automatically (those with Auto selected in the Type column), the system added the weights of the boxes automatically. For each box added manually, the gross weight must be specified.
UoM The unit of measure in which the weight of the package is specified.
Volume The volume of the package.
UoM The unit of measure in which the volume of the package is specified.
Declared value The amount of the package specified for insurance, you can edit the value if needed.
Cost of delivery amount The amount to be charged on delivery of the package, you can edit the value if needed.
Tracking number Here you can enter a tracking number for the package.
Custom ref. no. 1 An auxiliary reference number to appear on the carrier label for the box.
Custom ref. no. 2 An additional auxiliary reference number to appear on the carrier label for the box.
## The Webhook notification tab {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}View notification feedback{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Webhook notification feedback** window where the message from the third-party integrator is visible.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resend notification{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Resends the notification.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Success{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} If the message has been sent successfully, the value in the column is **True**. If it failed, the value is **False**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Event{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Represents the event category indicating if an entity has been created or updated. One of the following statuses will appear: + **Entity created** + **Entity updated** + **Entity deleted** - only available for accounts + **Document status changed** + **External action triggered** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the status of the message: + **Sent** + **Resent** + **Available** + **Consumed** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Source{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates the source of the event: Visma Net : If the source is this, the status can be **Sent** or **Resent** APIs : If the source is this, the status is **Available**. It is ready to be sent to third party-integrators. External integrator : If the source is this, the status is **Consumed**. The customer confirms receiving the message. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Document status{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Indicates that a document has a new status. For example, when a sales order is changed from status **On hold** to **Open**. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}User{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates which user made a change to the entity.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Date{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the date when the change was made.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Message{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates the detailed message identifier that has been sent.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Tasks

Windows

Shipment confirmation allocation (SO64201S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipment-confirmation-allocation-so64201s section This report displays the shipment confirmation allocation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment confirmation allocation (SO64201S) This report displays the shipment confirmation allocation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the shipment confirmation allocation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number for which a confirmation allocation window will be displayed when you run the report. Select a shipment to display and print its confirmation.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Shipping terms (CS208000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-terms-cs208000 page You can use this window for creating and maintaining the list of shipping terms in the system. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipping terms (CS208000) You can use this window for creating and maintaining the list of shipping terms in the system. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. You can use this window for creating and maintaining the list of shipping terms in the system. Shipping terms are used to define the shipping, packaging, and handling costs, depending on the shipment amount. ## Search line in list window If you are in the list window, the first line in the table is a search line. Each column has a search field which you can click to search for or filter on specific values and narrow down the displayed table rows. You can search and filter in as many columns as you need to, to only display the results you want to view. There are two types of search fields: + White: here you can type a specific search term to display results in this column containing this exact value. If you search on several (partial) words, you can separate them by a space or **%** and get different results: + space: the result contains the words in any order, + **%**: the result contains the words in the specific order, and the **%** functions as a wildcard as well. + Grey: you can click this to open the column filter pop-up window where you can filter the results for this column. ## The top part Use the elements in this area to add new shipping terms, or to view the details of an existing set of terms.
Element Description
Term ID The unique ID of the shipping terms. You can use up to 15 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description

A description of the shipping terms. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

> [!NOTE] > This field supports the multi-language functionality, where you can translate the entered text to multiple languages. For more information, see: About multi-language support

## The table You use this table to specify the break points for charges on shipments depending on the shipment amount. For details on the calculation and application of shipping terms, see: [About freight calculation](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/configure-automatic-packaging/about-freight-calculation/).
Column Description
Break amount A minimal shipment amount to which the settings specified on the line are applicable.
Freight cost % The percentage of the freight amount (charged by the carrier) that applies to values greater than this break amount. To leave the freight amount as charged by the carrier, specify 100%.
Invoice amount % The percentage of the invoice amount that applies to values greater than this break amount. To leave the invoice amount unchanged, specify 100%.
Shipping and handling The shipping and handling fee that applies to amounts greater than this break amount.
Line handling The flat handling fee that is specified for a document line, which applies to line amounts greater than this break amount.

Related pages

Concepts

Windows

Shipping zones (CS207510) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/shipping-zones-cs207510 page You use this window to create and maintain the list of shipping zones used to calculate freight charges when your company ships goods to customers. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipping zones (CS207510) You use this window to create and maintain the list of shipping zones used to calculate freight charges when your company ships goods to customers. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Shipping zones table You can use the table toolbar buttons to add a new shipping zone, sort the existing shipping zones, or remove any zone. After you have added a new shipping zone to the list and saved it, the system will reorder the items alphabetically.
Button Description
Load records from file Opens the File upload dialog box, which you can use to upload the file with the shipping zones list.
Column Description
Zone ID The unique ID of the shipping zone. You can use up to 20 characters, both numbers and letters.
Description A description of the shipping zone. You can use up to 30 characters, both numbers and letters.

Related pages

Windows

Sales reports /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports section 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales reports Sales reports - overview /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-reports-overview page Visma Net provides reports for the Sales workspace that meet your organisation's reporting needs. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales reports - overview Visma Net provides reports for the Sales workspace that meet your organisation's reporting needs. Visma Net provides reports for the Sales workspace that meet your organisation's reporting needs. The reports can also be customised. Because the Sales workspace is tightly integrated with other workspaces, including Inventory, Customer ledger, and Purchases, you can find and analyse the exact information you need. By using flexible selection options and data links, you can easily drill down from a report to any supporting details. Because the sales order reports are generated by user request, they run on only accounts and subaccounts that the user is authorised to access, based on the user's roles and membership in restriction groups. The reports can be generated in multiple formats, including PDF and HTML. Also, you can print the report you generated or send the report by email. ## Sales reports The Sales workspace includes the following reports: ### Window + [Quote (SO64101S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/quote-so64101s/): Presents the selected sales quote in a ready-to-print form. You can print the document or send it by email. + [Quote, right address (SO64108S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/quote-right-address-so64108s/) + [Order confirmation (SO64111S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-so64111s/): Presents the selected order in a ready-to-print form. You can print the document or send it by email. + [Order confirmation, right address (SO64118S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-windows/order-confirmation-right-address-so64118s/) + [Pick list (SO644000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/pick-list-so644000/): Displays the pick list created for a selected shipment in a ready-to-print form. The document can be printed or sent by email. + [Pro forma invoice (SO64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/inventory/inventory-windows/pro-forma-invoice-so64300s/) + [Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-confirmation-so642000-so64200s/): Generates the shipment confirmation form created for a selected shipment in a ready-to-print form. The document can be printed or sent by email. + [Carrier labels (SO645000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/carrier-labels-so645000/): Displays ready-to-print carrier labels generated for particular shipment. + [Invoice (SO643000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/invoice-so643000/): Displays invoices and notes in a ready-to-print form. ### Audit + [Sales order summary (SO610500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-summary-so610500/): Provides summary information on sales orders, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. + [Sales order details by customer (SO611000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-customer-so611000/): Displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. The data can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Sales order details by item (SO611500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-item-so611500/): Shows information on open sales orders, ordered by item. + [Shipment summary (SO620500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-summary-so620500/): Gives you information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Shipment details by customer (SO621000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-customer-so621000/): Shows information on shipments, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Shipment details by item (SO621500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-item-so621500/): Displays shipment information, ordered by item. Information can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. + [Order register (SO612000)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/order-register-so612000/): Displays the list of sales orders recorded in Visma Net during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and order type. + [Shipment register (SO612500)](/visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-register-so612500/): Displays the list of shipments during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and carrier.

Related pages

Windows

Carrier labels (SO645000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/carrier-labels-so645000 section You use this report to generate and print the carrier labels for a particular shipment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Carrier labels (SO645000) You use this report to generate and print the carrier labels for a particular shipment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The reference number of the shipment document for which you will generate carrier labels.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Invoice (SO643000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/invoice-so643000 section This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Invoice (SO643000) This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the selected invoice or note as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the upper left), the invoice-to and ship-to addresses of the customer, the required customer information, and the itemised list of goods being shipped, along with the prices. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Document type The document type for which information will be generated: Invoice, Debit note, Credit note, Fin. charge, Cash sale, or Void cash sale. Select a type, or leave the box blank to bring up multiple types.
Ref. no. The reference number of the document to be generated. If you don’t select a number, multiple invoices or notes will be generated, each on its own page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Order register (SO612000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/order-register-so612000 section This report displays the list of sales orders registered in Visma Net during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Order register (SO612000) This report displays the list of sales orders registered in Visma Net during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of sales orders registered in Visma Net during the specified period. Information can be filtered by warehouse, customer, and order type. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Order type The order type for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all order types.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Pick list (SO644000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/pick-list-so644000 section This report displays a pick list for the selected sales order as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Pick list (SO644000) This report displays a pick list for the selected sales order as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays a pick list for the selected sales order as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the list of items to be picked from various locations for the selected shipment. Quantity, weight, and volume information is provided for each items, and the total weight and volume are specified at the bottom of the document. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number; select one of the open shipments to prepare the pick list for it.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Quote (SO64101S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/quote-so64101s section With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Quote (SO64101S) With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. With this report, you can display the selected quote as a ready-to-print document. The document provides the company information (in the top left), the ship-to and invoice-to address of the customer, the pertinent shipping information, and the itemised information about goods to be shipped. > [!NOTE] > If you have added line notes in the order, only the first three lines of each note are displayed in the report. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Order type The type of sales order you want to view; a type must be specified. (Although by default the type of sales order is a quote in this report window, you can select any type.)
Order number The order number. Select a number, or leave the field blank to view all orders of the specified type, each on a separate page.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Sales order details by customer (SO611000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-customer-so611000 section This report displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order details by customer (SO611000) This report displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information on open sales orders, ordered by customer. The data can be filtered by warehouse, item, and document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Summary Select this check box to display only summary by customer.
Uncompleted lines only Select this check box to include only uncompleted lines of the orders.
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. You can select among stock and non-stock items including stock and non-stock kits. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Sales order details by item (SO611500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-details-by-item-so611500 section This report displays information on open sales orders grouped by item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order details by item (SO611500) This report displays information on open sales orders grouped by item. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information on open sales orders grouped by item. The data can be displayed for a specific item (stock item, non-stock item, stock kit, or non-stock kit) or it can be filtered by customer, warehouse, and document date. ## The Report parameters tab On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Summary Select this check box to display only a summary by item.
Uncompleted lines only Select this check box to include only uncompleted lines of the orders.
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. You can select among stock and non-stock items including stock and non-stock kits. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Sales order summary (SO610500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/sales-order-summary-so610500 section This report displays summary information about all sales orders, grouped by order type, reference number, and date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Sales order summary (SO610500) This report displays summary information about all sales orders, grouped by order type, reference number, and date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary information about all sales orders, grouped by order type, reference number, and date. You can select sales orders by customer, warehouse, or item, and you can easily drill-down to the details of each sales order. ## The Report parameters tab On the **Report parameters** tab, use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. You can select among stock and non-stock items including stock and non-stock kits. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
Open orders only A check box that you select to view only open sales orders.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-confirmation-so642000-so64200s section This report displays the shipment confirmation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment confirmation (SO642000/SO64200S) This report displays the shipment confirmation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the shipment confirmation form as a ready-to-print document for the selected shipment. The document provides the company information (on the top left), the ship-to address of the customer, the required shipping information, and the itemised information about goods being shipped. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Shipment no. The shipment number for which a confirmation window will be displayed when you run the report. Select a shipment to display and print its confirmation.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Shipment details by customer (SO621000) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-customer-so621000 section This report displays information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment details by customer (SO621000) This report displays information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by customer. Information can be filtered by warehouse, by item, and by document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Shipment details by item (SO621500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-details-by-item-so621500 section This report displays shipment details, grouped by item. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment details by item (SO621500) This report displays shipment details, grouped by item. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays shipment details, grouped by item. Information can be filtered by warehouse, by item, and by document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Shipment register (SO612500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-register-so612500 section This report displays the list of shipments registered in Visma Net during the specified period. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment register (SO612500) This report displays the list of shipments registered in Visma Net during the specified period. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays the list of shipments registered in Visma Net during the specified period. You can filter the list by customer, warehouse, and carrier. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Carrier ID The ship via code associated with the carrier. Leave the field blank to view information on all carriers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts

Shipment summary (SO620500) /visma-net-erp/help/sales/sales-reports/shipment-summary-so620500 section This report displays summary information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. 2026-02-19T17:09:06+01:00 # Shipment summary (SO620500) This report displays summary information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. This topic provides information about the elements in this window in Visma Net, such as fields, field values, buttons, and check boxes. This report displays summary information on shipments with all statuses, ordered by order type, reference number, and date. Information can be filtered by customer, warehouse, by item, and by document date. ## The Report parameters tab You can use the following parameters to select the information to be displayed on the report:
Element Description
Start date The start date of the time interval of interest. A start date must be specified.
End date The end date of the time interval of interest. An end date must be specified.
Customer no. The customer for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all customers.
Warehouse (This field is only displayed if the Multiple warehouses functionality is enabled in the Enable/disable functionalities (CS100000) window.) The warehouse for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all warehouses.
Item ID The item for which you want to view information. Leave the field blank to view information on all items.
## The report settings and options Before running a report, you set a variety of parameters in the report window. You can select a template or manually make selections that affect the information to be collected. Also, you can specify appropriate settings to print or email the report generated. ### The report window toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the report window toolbar when you are configuring a report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates to and from the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh.png) **Cancel**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Clears any changes you have made and restores default settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Run report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Initiates data collection for the report and displays the generated report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Save template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Saves the currently selected report as a template with all the selected settings.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Remove template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Removes the previously saved template. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Select schedule name** dialog box, which you can use to schedule the processing of the report. This button is available only when you select a template.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit report{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Opens Visma BI - Report Designer in a new browser tab, where you can edit your report. > [!NOTE] > However, if you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, you will be navigated to the [Report definitions (CS206000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-windows/report-definitions-cs206000/) window to make your changes there. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export report design{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Makes a copy of the report that you can import (for example, for another company) by using the ![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) button on the **Report versions** tab. Then you select that the copy of the report is not going to be the default version which is used when you click the **Run report** button. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Select schedule name dialog box {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Schedule{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The schedule for report processing. Select an existing schedule, or leave the field blank and click **OK** to open the [Automation schedules (SM205020)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/automation-schedules-sm205020/) window to create a new schedule for running the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merge reports{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} When this check box is selected, this report will be merged with the other reports selected for merging into one net report when processed. > [!NOTE] > You can check the reports that will be merged when processed in the [Send reports (SM205060)](/visma-net-erp/help/automation/automation-windows/send-reports-sm205060/) window. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Merging order{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report in the net report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The template area Use the elements in this area to select an existing template and then use the template, share it with other users, or use it as your default report settings. The template area elements, which are available for all reports, are described in the following table. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Template{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The template to be used for the report. If any templates were created and saved, you can select a template to use its settings for the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Default{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is marked as the default one for you. A default template cannot be shared.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Shared{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the selected template is shared with other users. A shared template cannot be marked as the default.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Locale{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} A locale that you select to indicate to the system that the report should be prepared with the data translated to the language associated with this locale. > [!NOTE] > This field is displayed if there are multiple active locales in the system. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The report toolbar The following table lists the buttons of the toolbar after you run the configured report. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Buttons{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-edit](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-edit.png) **Parameters**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Navigates back to the report window to let you change the report parameters.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-refresh-report](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-refresh-report.png) **Refresh**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refreshes the information displayed in the report (if any data changes were made).{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Groups{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Adds to the report a left pane where the report structure is shown. Click a report node to highlight the pertinent data in the right pane.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-view-pdf](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-view-pdf.png) **View PDF** / **View HTML**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report as a PDF, or displays the report in HTML format. The available button depends on the current report view; if you are viewing a PDF, for instance, you will see the **View HTML** button.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to first page (Ctrl + Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the first page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to previous page (Page up){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the previous page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to next page (Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the next page.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Go to last page (Ctrl + Page down){{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the last page of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the browser dialog box so you can print the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Send{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Opens the **Email activity** dialog box, which you use to send the report file (in the chosen format) to the specified email address.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Export{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Allows you to export the data in the chosen format: + **Excel** + **Excel with headers** (this option is only available for ARM reports) + **PDF** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report parameters tab This tab includes sections where you can specify the contents of the report depending on the current report and vary in the following regards: + How many elements and which elements are available on a particular report + Whether elements contain default values + Whether specific elements require values to be selected + Whether elements may be left blank to let you display a broader range of data ### The Additional sort and filters tab If you are working with a [Balance sheet (GL634000)](/visma-net-erp/help/general-ledger/general-ledger-reports/balance-sheet-gl634000/) report or any Profit and loss report or a [Profit and loss (PM64300S)](/visma-net-erp/help/project-accounting/projects-reports/profit-and-loss-pm64300s/) report, this tab is not shown in your report window. The **Additional sort and filters** tab contains additional sorting and filtering conditions: Additional sorting conditions : Defines the sorting order. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and select the **Descending** or **Ascending** sort order for the column. Additional filtering conditions : Defines the report filter. You can add a line, select one of the report-specific properties, and define a condition and its value. The list of conditions includes one-operand and two-operand conditions. To create a more complicated logical expression, you can use brackets and logical operations between brackets. ### The Print and email settings tab #### The Print settings section If you plan to print the report or save the report as a PDF, select the appropriate settings in the **Print settings** section. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Element{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Deleted records{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Selects the visibility of the data deleted from the database. + **Hide** + **Print** + **Only** {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print all pages{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Prints all pages of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Print in PDF format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Displays the report in PDF format.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Compress PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate a compressed PDF.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Embed fonts in PDF file{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Indicates that the system will generate the PDF with fonts embedded.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} #### The Email settings section If you plan to send the report as an email, in the **Email settings** section, specify the format in which the report will be sent, as well as the email subject, the recipients of copies of the report, and the email of the recipient. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Field{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Format{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} The format in which the report will be emailed: + **HTML** + **PDF** + **Excel** + **Excel with header** (this option is only available for ARM reports) > [!NOTE] > The merge function for reports in Excel format is not supported. If you want to merge a report with other reports and send an aggregated report by email, you should select either the HTML or PDF format for the report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}To{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of the recipient.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Cc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}An additional addressee to receive a carbon copy ( **Cc** ) of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Bcc{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The email address of anyone to receive a blind carbon copy ( **Bcc** ) of the email; an address you enter in this box will be hidden from other recipients.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Subject{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The subject of the email.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} ### The Report versions tab This tab shows the data only to users assigned with the Report designer user role If the report has multiple versions, you can select one of them. {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Button{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Edit version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this to edit the selection version of the report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Refresh dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Click this button to refresh the data set you have selected.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Activate{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Temporarily activates the selected report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}![icon-load-from-file](/media/visma-net-erp/icon-load-from-file.png) **Import report design**{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}} Click this button to select an exported report you want to import into this company. This button is only available for users assigned with the Report designer user role. The imported report will be set as the active report. {{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-table >}} {{< vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Column{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell header="true" >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-header-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Version{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The number of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Description{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The description of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Active{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}When this check box is selected, the report version is active.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Created{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}The creation date of the report version.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-row >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}Not default dataset{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< vismanet-cell >}}This check box is automatically selected if the report version is an import of an external report.{{< /vismanet-cell >}} {{< /vismanet-row >}} {{< /vismanet-table >}}

Related pages

Concepts